10052-9-V18-MAH0-00071 001

QKHXEK1-1360 0

Aly Desouky
2009/10/15 , 03:40:40 PM
 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

STG Building # Ventilation Fans

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 P.O. Box 410
Schofield, WI 54476

Phone: 715.359.6171
www.greenheck.com

PROTECTING AND REPAIRING THE FINISH

These recommendations are intended to assist architects, contractors, owners, building managers,
etc., who are concerned with the care and maintenance of painted &/or anodized architectural
aluminum. The information contains suggested methods as an aid in establishing safe, sound
cleaning and maintenance procedures.

TODAY'S HIGH QUALITY PAINTED AND ANODIZED FINISHES ARE EXTREMELY

DURABLE. But even the best finish needs a little TLC; and with the most careful treatment of
the louvers or architectural products during installation and daily use, occasional damage will
occur.

This article discusses the recommended care of painted or anodized finishes on architectural
metal and looks at three levels of concern: Care and Cleaning, Minor Repairs, and More
Complex Refinishing.

The Care and Cleaning of Painted Material

Today’s factory applied heat-cured painted finishes are durable and very colorfast. The Kynar
and Hylar based products that meet the AAMA 2605 specification and/or ASCA 96 with trade
names such as Duranar by PPG, Fluropon by Valspar or Trinar by Akzo-Nobel are warranted to
retain their color and gloss level for many years. However, to assure that they retain their original
beauty, even these highly durable finishes should be cleaned occasionally. When selecting a
cleaning solution use mild soap solutions that are safe for use with your bare hands such as those
products that one would use to wash a car. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners as they
may damage the finish.

Solvents no stronger than mineral spirits or denatured alcohol may be used to remove grease,
sealants or other materials. Never mix cleaners or cleaners and solvents as the resultant mixture
can cause harmful or even dangerous results. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials such as
steel wool or abrasive brushes, which can also harm the surface.

Once heavy soil, grease or sealant is removed the mild soap solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or soft brush. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth.

In coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas containing heavy industrial
pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular basis. For example cleaning the painted
finish can be scheduled as a part of the regular maintenance program for glass cleaning.
Cleaning Anodized Material
Anodized material has an extremely hard surface that is very colorfast and mar resistant. The
Class I clear or color anodized finishes applied by a computer automated, high quality
commercial anodizer specializing in architectural finishing will provide consistent color and long
product life in a variety of applications.

Much like painted surfaces, an anodized finish should be cleaned using mild soap solutions to
retain its original beauty. Products that are safe for use with bare hands including most
commercial cleaning products can be safely used. The cleaning solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or brush. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners.

Severely soiled anodized surfaces can be cleaned a little more aggressively than painted surfaces.
For example, slight scuffmarks and rub marks on an anodized surface can be removed with a
mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brite pad. Use the pad to remove the mark, then clean the
surface using the mild soap solution. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with
a soft cloth.

As with painted surfaces, in coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas
containing heavy industrial pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular maintenance
program.

Field Touch Up
It is almost a given that some damage will occur and touchup work will be required during or
after installation. But the good news is that both painted and anodized surface damage can be
easily repaired if the damage is slight such as a scratch or rub mark. Minor painted surface
damage can be sanded prior to touchup painting with excellent results. For scratches or gouges
use a relatively course grit paper to remove the damage, then use progressively finer paper to
remove the sanding marks, finishing with a 180 to 220 grit paper.

Sanding of anodized material that is going to be touched up is not recommended. The anodized
surface is aluminum oxide, which is generally harder than the sandpaper. Some rub marks on an
anodized surface can be removed with a mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brits pad prior to
touch up painting.

Custom finishers usually supply a limited mount of touch-up paint with the project material.
Touchup paint is supplied in small aerosols or bottles with a built in brush for easy application
and is to be applied very sparingly. It is intended to cover small blemishes or to touchup exposed
cut ends on fabricated parts. It is not intended for use on large areas of more than a few square
inches. The color will closely match the factory applied painted or anodized finish, however the
finish is not as hard nor performance the same as the baked on finishes. After cleaning the area to
be touched up, wipe the area with denatured alcohol to remove any moisture or cleaning residue
and apply the touchup per the finisher’s instructions. Use caution as excessive use of touch up
paint may void the original finisher’s warranty.
 Serving area: STG Bldg GF
QTY: 3 Supply fan + 3 Exhaust fan
Selected Models: SBCS-3H54- 75
SBCE-3L54- 30 PN 471755

Capacites: 46366 m3/hr Supply,
41728m3/hr Exhaust
Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 Serving area: STG Bldg Mezz
QTY: 3 Supply fan + 3 Exhaust fan
Selected Models: SBCS-3H54- 75
SBCE-3L54- 30
PN 471755
Capacities: 46366 m3/hr Supply, 41728 m3/hr


Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 Serving area: STG Bldg Operating
QTY: 8 Supply fan
Selected Models: SBCS-3H54- 100
Capacities: 46366 m3/hr Supply
PN 471755


Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 PN 460983

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
TBI Tubular Belt Inline Fan
®
PH. 715-359-6171
www.greenheck.com
TDI Tubular Direct Inline Fan

Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Serving area: STG Bldg
Capacity : 45195 m3/hr
QTY:8
Selected Model: TBI-CA-5L54- 50
Exhaust Fan

TBI-CA, TBI-FS TDI

Level 3, 4 & 5 Level 3, 4 & 5
RECEIVING
Greenheck model TBI / TDI fans are thoroughly inspected and test run at the factory. Items such as proper propeller
alignment, balance, and workmanship are analyzed by personnel using state-of-the art equipment. However, damage may
occur during handling and shipping. Therefore, it is important that the unit be carefully inspected for visible and concealed
damage before beginning installation. In addition, check to see that all accessory items are accounted for.

Report any damaged equipment to the shipper immediately!

Lifting Locations
HANDLING with optional
Fans should NOT be lifted by the shaft, housing, motor, belt guard, or any mounting brackets
accessories.

Units - Flanged Housing Only

Use a minimum of four bolt holes, two per flange, or attach two suitable chains /
straps around the entire fan housing, one near each duct flange, when lifting large
horizontal fans. Secure the fan housing to prevent the weight of a top or side
mounted motor from rotating the housing while being lifted.

For vertical hanging installations, attach a suitable lifting device to the fan housing or
inlet/outlet flange.

Units - With Mounting Brackets

Fans are to be rigged by either the optional brackets provided or by the skid when a
forklift is used. Slings can be attached as described above or to mounting brackets
located at the ends of the fan housing (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
STORAGE - Indoor and Outdoor
When a fan is to be stored for a period of time, it must be protected from dirt and moisture. Use of a tarp to cover the unit
will aid in keeping it clean and dry, but avoid using a black plastic tarp as it will promote condensation. Improper storage
which results in damage to the fan will void the warranty. If the storage period is lengthy, the propeller and motor should be
rotated periodically and the bearings purged with fresh grease. In humid, dusty, or corrosive atmospheres, rotate the fan and
purge the bearings once a month. Under normal conditions, this procedure should be repeated once every three months.
June 2001
 INSTALLATION
EFFECT OF INSTALLATION ON PERFORMANCE
Any installation with inlet or discharge configurations that deviate from these recommendations may result in reduced fan
performance. Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can cause pre-rotation of incoming air or uneven loading of the fan
prop yielding large system losses and increased sound levels. Free discharge or turbulent flow in the discharge ductwork
will also result in system effect losses.

The most common inlet and discharge conditions which affect fan performance are:
INLET DUCT TURNS DISCHARGE DUCT TURNS

Poor

1 Fan
Wheel
Dia.

Turning
Vanes
Length of Straight Duct

Good Poor

Good

Installation of a duct turn or elbow too close to the fan inlet
reduces fan performance because air is loaded unevenly into
the fan prop. To achieve full fan performance there should
be at least one to two fan prop diameters between the turn
or elbow and the fan inlet.
Fan performance is reduced when duct turns are made
immediately off the fan discharge. To achieve cataloged
fan performance, there should be at least one equivalent
duct diameter of straight ductwork between the fan
discharge and any duct turns.

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS - WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS

Following are typical mounting installations for models with mounting brackets. Diagrams show dimensions for ceiling hung
installations, the dimensions for floor or base mount installations are mirror images of these. For TBI's with motor in the 3 or
9 o'clock position or vertical installations, additional mounting rails are recommended. Mounting rail dimensions are shown
for field fabrication.

Horizontal Vertical
B
D C
A B C

Optional
Mounting
Rails g

Optional
Mounting
Rails

Motor at 3 or 9 o’clock position

Mounting Hole Locations
Unit Level Identification - Refer to TBI/TDI A B C D
fan name plate Fan Belt Direct Belt Drive Direct Drive Belt Belt
Example: TBI-3L42 (level 3) Size Drive Drive Level 3 Level 4/5 Level 3 Level 4/5 Drive Drive
TBI-4H30 (level 4) 18 17.63 17.63 17.38 21.38 13.38 21.38 26.00 28.00
20 19.00 19.00 17.38 22.38 14.38 21.38 28.50 29.25
24 21.88 21.88 18.38 23.38 14.38 21.38 33.00 33.75
GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410 30 26.13 26.13 19.38 28.38 16.38 25.88 37.00 38.75
PH. 715-359-6171
® www.greenheck.com
36 30.50 30.50 21.88 26.88 13.88 23.38 44.00 47.00
MODEL 42 34.75 34.75 22.88 31.88 19.88 26.38 50.00 51.25
S/N 48 42.00 42.00 25.38 36.38 19.38 31.38 56.00 61.00
MARK 54 46.75 46.75 29.88 40.38 NA 31.38 62.00 65.50
60 51.00 51.00 32.38 41.38 NA 31.38 71.00 70.00
TYPICAL HIGH TEMPERATURE CONTINUOUS DUTY INSTALLATIONS

Roof
TBI-FS with optional high temperature
construction are factory modified for operation
in high temperature continuous duty Ambient temperature
not to exceed 120∞F
applications. With propeller on the discharge
end of the fan, negative pressure is created in
the belt tube during operation. Ambient air is
drawn in through the belt tube and cools the Duct to heat source
belts and bearings.
Minimum duct
Airflow at discharge
For the greatest amount of internal cooling,
discharge static pressure should be kept to a
minimum while keeping most of the pressure
on the inlet side. Locate the fan at ends of the
duct runs and near the discharge point in the Cooling air for
drives and
system. This set-up will promote the ambient bearings
air cooling effect.

Wall and/or ceiling should enclose

fan when used for emergency heat
OPERATION and smoke exhaust.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Before electrical connections are made, the supply voltage, phase and ampere capacity must be checked for compatibility
with the fan motor. In addition, the supply wiring must be properly fused and conform to local and national electrical codes.
The supply wires are then connected to an optional safety disconnect switch (if supplied) or wired directly to the motor.

PRE-START UP CHECKS
1. Check all fasteners for tightness. This includes motor bolts, bearing bolts, and any set screws or locking collars attaching
the propeller to the shaft and shaft to the bearings.
2. Prop rotation should be in the same direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit. For 3-phase installations, fan
rotation can be reversed by simply interchanging any two of the three electrical leads. For single phase installations,
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
3. (Belt Drive) Adjustable motor pulleys are preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan speed can be increased by
closing or decreased by opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an
equal number of turns open or closed.
Note: Any change, increase or decrease, in fan speed can represent a substantial increase in
horsepower required from the motor. Always check motor load amperage and compare to name plate
rating when changing fan speed.

MAINTENANCE

WARNING
Disconnect and secure to the “OFF” position all electrical power to the fan prior to inspection or
servicing. Failure to comply with this safety precaution could result in serious injury or death.

Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic maintenance program should be set up to preserve the reliability and
performance of the fan. Items to be included in this program are:
• BEARINGS • SET SCREWS • BELTS
• LUBRICATION • FASTENERS • REMOVAL OF DUST/DIRT
BEARINGS (Belt Drive)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals. Locking collars and set
screws, in addition to fasteners attaching the bearing to the bearing plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperature above 32º F (0º C) and below 200º F (93º C), fan shaft bearings with grease fittings should be
lubricated semi-annually using a high quality lithium based grease. If unusual environmental conditions exist such as
temperatures below 32º F (0º C) and above 200º F (93º C), moisture or contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with a manual grease gun. Be careful not to unseat the seal by over lubricating
or using excessive pressure. Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for life.
BELTS (Belt Drive) Deflection = Belt Span
64
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by improper belt tension (either too tight or
too loose) or misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating a V-belt is the lowest
tension at which the belts will not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection half-way between pulley centers is 1/64” for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches, the belt deflection should be one inch
using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint of the drive (Fig. 2).
Belt Span
Check belt tension two times during the first 24 hours of operation and periodically
thereafter. To adjust belt tension, simply pivot the motor on the motor plate. Use the Fig. 2
bolts in the slotted brackets and adjustment rods with bolts as adjustment points until
proper belt tension is attained.
It is very important that the drive pulleys remain in proper alignment after adjustments
are made. Misalignment of pulleys will result in premature belt wear, noise, vibration
and power loss (Fig. 3).

FASTENERS AND SET SCREWS (Belt & Direct Drive) Fig. 3

A periodic inspection should include checking all fasteners and set screws for tightness.
Particular attention should be paid to set screws and locking collars attaching the propeller
to the shaft and the shaft to the bearings. Loose bearing set screws and locking collars will lead to premature failure of the
fan shaft.
MOTOR LUBRICATION (Belt & Direct Drive)
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors installed on the smaller fans
are lubricated for life and require no further attention. Greasing of motors is intended only when fittings are provided.
Motors equipped with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor. Use
a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease fittings should be
greased according to directions printed on the motor.
REMOVAL OF DUST AND DIRT (Belt & Direct Drive)
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing, contaminates bearing lubricant, and collects on the impeller causing
severe imbalance if left unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor and impeller should be thoroughly cleaned periodically.
Use caution and do not allow water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings. Under no circumstances should motors or
bearings be sprayed with steam or water.

PARTS LIST
MOTOR MOTOR
PULLEY MOTOR
COVER
MOTOR (OPTIONAL)
Each fan bears a PLATE BELT
manufacturer's PROPELLER
nameplate with model BELT
number and serial TUBE
BEARING
number embossed. This SUPPORT
information in addition SHAFT
to the shown parts PULLEY
diagram will assist the
local Greenheck BEARING
representative and the COVER
factory in providing
service and replacement
MOUNTING
parts. BRACKETS BEARINGS SHAFT
(Qty. of 4)

Warranty
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the
purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option when returned
to our factory, transportation prepaid.
Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective
during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for
any removal or installation costs.

IOM TBI TDI

Copyright © 2001 Greenheck Fan Corp. Rev. 1 June 2001
 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PN 453148

Serving area: STG bldg Stairwell

Qty : 1
Selected Model: RSFP-200- 100 Roof Supply Fans
® Capacity : 25308 m3/hr
Pressurization Fan
Models RSF and RSFP

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Model RSF

Model RSFP

Greenheck Model RSF and RSFP fans are thoroughly inspected and test run at the factory, however damage
may occur during handling and shipping. Consequently, it is important to inspect the unit for visible and
concealed damage before beginning installation. Report any damage to the shipper immediately. In addition,
assure all accessory items are accounted for.

Dimensional Data
B SQ. BL SQ.

F
C CL

J
D D
G H
2 1/2 in. 2 1/2 in.
A
A SQ. A SQ.
BASE OF UNIT
RSF RSFP
M
Louver Weights
Fan A B BL K L Nominal
C CL D F G H J M Tiers
Size SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. Filter RSFP RSF RSFP L K
SQ. SQ.
90 26 351/8 317/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 121/4 103/4 75/8 67/8 241/2 121/4 61/8 (4) 12x20 3 145 126
100 30 411/8 357/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 135/8 117/8 91/16 83/16 281/2 141/4 71/8 (4) 12x25 3 173 146
120 34 471/8 397/8 271/4 293/8 101/4 161/8 137/8 101/16 815/16 321/2 181/4 71/8 (4) 16x25 4 225 180 M
150 40 531/8 457/8 311/4 333/8 101/4 191/8 161/2 111/4 107/16 381/2 201/4 91/8 (8) 16x20 5 336 250
(4) 16x20 M
180 46 611/8 517/8 341/4 353/8 121/4 221/2 191/2 101/8 113/4 441/2 261/4 91/8 5 400 285
(4) 20x20
OPTIONAL DUCT ADAPTER
200 52 731/8 583/16 391/4 403/8 121/4 231/4 251/4 133/8 143/8 501/2 301/4 101/8 (8) 20x25 6 620 431
All dimensions are in inches.

1
Lifting
Lifting the RSF and RSFP model fans must be done with care to avoid
damaging the housing. For Model RSF attach four lifting devices under the
outer housing, each device beneath the vertical row of fasteners (Fig. 1).
Lifting devices should be a minimum of 3 in. wide to avoid damaging the
sheet metal housing. Do not lift Model RSF near the center of the outer
housing. Fig. 1
For Model RSFP attach a minimum of four lifting devices under an exterior
louver panel, each device near the corner of the louvered housing. Lift Here
Lift Here

Installation
Move the fan to its intended location and fasten it securely through mounting holes provided in the fan base. Shims may be
necessary depending upon thickness of the roofing material. For ducted applications, an optional duct adapter (if provided)
is attached and holds the ductwork in place prior to installing the unit. The following diagram shows a typical installation
with prefab roof curb and ductwork.

TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Curb Recom. Duct Nominal
Fan Roof Size Damper
Size* Opening ID Size
RSF unit with prepunched RSF/RSFP- 90 241/2 15 12 12 x 12
mounting holes and 21/2 inch
RSF/RSFP- 100 281/2 17 14 14 x 14
skirt to aid in installation.
RSF/RSFP- 120 321/2 21 18 18 x 18
Ductwork (by others) RSF/RSFP- 150 381/2 23 20 20 x 20

Duct adapter (optional) allows RSF/RSFP- 180 441/2 29 26 26 x 26

ductwork to be completed
prior to setting unit on curb.
Roof Curb
RSF/RSFP- 200 501/2 33 30 30 x 30
All dimensions are in inches.
Note: In cases where extreme snow depths may be
encountered, extended base may be required to raise unit
or condensation pans may be required in ductwork.
*Recommended curb size shown is outside curb
dimension without roofing and flashing.

Access to the motor compartment is made by releasing four latches which secure the cover. The cover should be placed in
an area where wind will not blow it off the roof.

Electrical Connection
The electrical supply must be compatible with the fan motor with regard to voltage, phase and amperage capacity.
Moreover, the electrical supply line must be properly fused and conform to local and national electrical codes.
Electrical lead-in wires should be routed through the pre-punched hole in the optional duct adapter (if provided) and the
punched hole in the bottom of the fan housing. Electrical wires must be located so as not to rub on moving components.
The electrical supply line is connected to the optional safety disconnect switch (if provided) or wired directly to the motor.

Pre-Starting Checks

Note: For units shipped with motor and drives separate, refer to the Motor Mounting Instructions included in the hardware
bag.

WARNING!
DISCONNECT AND SECURE TO THE “OFF” POSITION ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE FAN PRIOR TO INSPECTION OR
SERVICING. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS SAFETY PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

Check all fasteners and set screws for tightness. Rotate the fan wheel by hand
to assure it turns freely and is centered between the inlets. Check pulleys and
belts for proper alignment to avoid premature belt wear, noise, vibration and
power loss. Motor and fan pulleys must be parallel and in line (Fig. 2).

The adjustable motor pulley is set at the factory for the fan RPM specified. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by opening the adjustable
motor pulley. Two groove variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal WRONG WRONG CORRECT
Fig. 2
2
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed results in an increase in horsepower required for the motor. Motor load
amperes should always be checked and compared to nameplate rating when changing fan speed.

Direction of fan wheel rotation is critical. A fan wheel rotating in the wrong
ROTATIO ROT
AT
direction will result in reduced airflow, motor overloading and possible burn- N

IO
out. Check wheel rotation by momentarily turning the fan on.

N
Rotation should be in the same direction as airflow at the outlet. See housing
and wheel examples in Fig. 3. IMPORTANT NOTE: RSF/RSFP fans should be
operated only when attached to the completed system. Without proper
static pressure loading, the motor may be overloaded and burnout may
occur.
Fig. 3 AIRFLOW

Routine Maintenance - See WARNING Page 2

To preserve the reliability and performance designed into the fan, regularly scheduled maintenance should be performed.
Items to be checked at each maintenance interval are filters, belts, bearings, fasteners, lubrication and removal of dust and
dirt.

Filters
1 inch washable aluminum mesh filters are standard on Model RSF and RSFP fans. (Optional 2 inch filters may be supplied
on some fans). Filters should be cleaned on a regular basis for optimum efficiency.

To remove the filters, first remove the fan cover by releasing the four latches. (Place the cover in an area where wind will not
blow it off the roof). The filters can be lifted out and washed in a mild detergent solution. If desired, an adhesive spray
available at most filter distributors can be applied to increase filter efficiency.

Belts
Belt tension should be checked two times during the first 24 hours of
operation and during each scheduled maintenance thereafter. Premature belt
failures are frequently caused by improper belt tension, either too tight or
loose. The proper belt tension for operating a V-belt is the lowest tension at Belt Span
which the belt will not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning, belt
deflection should be 1/64 inch for each inch of belt span, determined by using
moderate thumb pressure half way between pulley centers. For example, the
belt deflection should be 1/2 inch if the belt span is 32 inches (Fig. 4).

Belt tension can be adjusted by loosening the motor plate hinge bolts and
adjusting the jack screws as required. RSF/RSFP units are supplied with Deflection =
either a painted steel motor bracket or a galvanized motor plate for larger Belt Span
motor frames. To adjust belt tension on units equipped with the painted steel 64
motor bracket, simply adjust the single jack screw. Fig. 4

For units equipped with a galvanized motor plate, both jack screws must be adjusted equally. Check pulley and belt
alignment after adjusting belt tension (Fig. 2).

Lubrication
Fan bearings on Model RSF and RSFP are permanently lubricated. Motor bearings equipped with grease fittings should be
lubricated in accordance with instructions on the motor nameplate. Motors without grease fittings are lubricated for life.

Cleaning
Motors and Fan Wheels require periodic cleaning to remove dust and dirt which may accumulate. Motor cleaning should be
limited to the exterior surface only. Removing dust and dirt from the motor housing assists in motor cooling and prolongs
motor life. Motors should never be sprayed with steam, water or solvents.
Fan wheels which are left to accumulate dust and dirt will have poor air performance, loss of efficiency and possible
damaging vibration due to an unbalanced condition.

Periodic cleaning is a good investment in preserving the reliability and performance designed into the fan.

3
 PARTS LIST

Blower Unit

Filters
*Motor Plate

Shaft Pulley
Motor

Blower Mounting Angle

Motor Pulley

Belt
Shock Mounts (4)

*Galvanized motor plate shown. Painted steel motor bracket used on units with smaller motor frame sizes.

Note: The unit serial number, located on the Greenheck name tag, should be provided when requesting parts or
information.

Warranty
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from
the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our
option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid.
The motor is warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should the motor furnished by Greenheck
prove defective during this period, it should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck
will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
PH. 715-359-6171
® www.greenheck.com
RSF/RSFP IOM
#453148 Rev 2 Dec 2004
Copyright © 2004 Greenheck Fan Corp.
 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

CTG Building # Ventilation Fans

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 P.O. Box 410
Schofield, WI 54476

Phone: 715.359.6171
www.greenheck.com

PROTECTING AND REPAIRING THE FINISH

These recommendations are intended to assist architects, contractors, owners, building managers,
etc., who are concerned with the care and maintenance of painted &/or anodized architectural
aluminum. The information contains suggested methods as an aid in establishing safe, sound
cleaning and maintenance procedures.

TODAY'S HIGH QUALITY PAINTED AND ANODIZED FINISHES ARE EXTREMELY

DURABLE. But even the best finish needs a little TLC; and with the most careful treatment of
the louvers or architectural products during installation and daily use, occasional damage will
occur.

This article discusses the recommended care of painted or anodized finishes on architectural
metal and looks at three levels of concern: Care and Cleaning, Minor Repairs, and More
Complex Refinishing.

The Care and Cleaning of Painted Material

Today’s factory applied heat-cured painted finishes are durable and very colorfast. The Kynar
and Hylar based products that meet the AAMA 2605 specification and/or ASCA 96 with trade
names such as Duranar by PPG, Fluropon by Valspar or Trinar by Akzo-Nobel are warranted to
retain their color and gloss level for many years. However, to assure that they retain their original
beauty, even these highly durable finishes should be cleaned occasionally. When selecting a
cleaning solution use mild soap solutions that are safe for use with your bare hands such as those
products that one would use to wash a car. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners as they
may damage the finish.

Solvents no stronger than mineral spirits or denatured alcohol may be used to remove grease,
sealants or other materials. Never mix cleaners or cleaners and solvents as the resultant mixture
can cause harmful or even dangerous results. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials such as
steel wool or abrasive brushes, which can also harm the surface.

Once heavy soil, grease or sealant is removed the mild soap solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or soft brush. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth.

In coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas containing heavy industrial
pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular basis. For example cleaning the painted
finish can be scheduled as a part of the regular maintenance program for glass cleaning.
Cleaning Anodized Material
Anodized material has an extremely hard surface that is very colorfast and mar resistant. The
Class I clear or color anodized finishes applied by a computer automated, high quality
commercial anodizer specializing in architectural finishing will provide consistent color and long
product life in a variety of applications.

Much like painted surfaces, an anodized finish should be cleaned using mild soap solutions to
retain its original beauty. Products that are safe for use with bare hands including most
commercial cleaning products can be safely used. The cleaning solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or brush. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners.

Severely soiled anodized surfaces can be cleaned a little more aggressively than painted surfaces.
For example, slight scuffmarks and rub marks on an anodized surface can be removed with a
mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brite pad. Use the pad to remove the mark, then clean the
surface using the mild soap solution. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with
a soft cloth.

As with painted surfaces, in coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas
containing heavy industrial pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular maintenance
program.

Field Touch Up
It is almost a given that some damage will occur and touchup work will be required during or
after installation. But the good news is that both painted and anodized surface damage can be
easily repaired if the damage is slight such as a scratch or rub mark. Minor painted surface
damage can be sanded prior to touchup painting with excellent results. For scratches or gouges
use a relatively course grit paper to remove the damage, then use progressively finer paper to
remove the sanding marks, finishing with a 180 to 220 grit paper.

Sanding of anodized material that is going to be touched up is not recommended. The anodized
surface is aluminum oxide, which is generally harder than the sandpaper. Some rub marks on an
anodized surface can be removed with a mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brits pad prior to
touch up painting.

Custom finishers usually supply a limited mount of touch-up paint with the project material.
Touchup paint is supplied in small aerosols or bottles with a built in brush for easy application
and is to be applied very sparingly. It is intended to cover small blemishes or to touchup exposed
cut ends on fabricated parts. It is not intended for use on large areas of more than a few square
inches. The color will closely match the factory applied painted or anodized finish, however the
finish is not as hard nor performance the same as the baked on finishes. After cleaning the area to
be touched up, wipe the area with denatured alcohol to remove any moisture or cleaning residue
and apply the touchup per the finisher’s instructions. Use caution as excessive use of touch up
paint may void the original finisher’s warranty.
 Serving area: CTG bldg
Qty: 12
Selected Model: SBCS-3H54- 100
PN 471755
Capacity : 46750 m3/hr
Supply Fan


Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 PN 460983

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
TBI Tubular Belt Inline Fan
®
PH. 715-359-6171
www.greenheck.com
TDI Tubular Direct Inline Fan

Installation Operation and Maintenance Manual

READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
Serving area: CTG Bldg
Capacity : 42500 m3/hr
QTY:12
Selected Model: TBI-CA-4L48- 75
Exhaust Fan

TBI-CA, TBI-FS TDI

Level 3, 4 & 5 Level 3, 4 & 5
RECEIVING
Greenheck model TBI / TDI fans are thoroughly inspected and test run at the factory. Items such as proper propeller
alignment, balance, and workmanship are analyzed by personnel using state-of-the art equipment. However, damage may
occur during handling and shipping. Therefore, it is important that the unit be carefully inspected for visible and concealed
damage before beginning installation. In addition, check to see that all accessory items are accounted for.

Report any damaged equipment to the shipper immediately!

Lifting Locations
HANDLING with optional
Fans should NOT be lifted by the shaft, housing, motor, belt guard, or any mounting brackets
accessories.

Units - Flanged Housing Only

Use a minimum of four bolt holes, two per flange, or attach two suitable chains /
straps around the entire fan housing, one near each duct flange, when lifting large
horizontal fans. Secure the fan housing to prevent the weight of a top or side
mounted motor from rotating the housing while being lifted.

For vertical hanging installations, attach a suitable lifting device to the fan housing or
inlet/outlet flange.

Units - With Mounting Brackets

Fans are to be rigged by either the optional brackets provided or by the skid when a
forklift is used. Slings can be attached as described above or to mounting brackets
located at the ends of the fan housing (Fig. 1).
Fig. 1
STORAGE - Indoor and Outdoor
When a fan is to be stored for a period of time, it must be protected from dirt and moisture. Use of a tarp to cover the unit
will aid in keeping it clean and dry, but avoid using a black plastic tarp as it will promote condensation. Improper storage
which results in damage to the fan will void the warranty. If the storage period is lengthy, the propeller and motor should be
rotated periodically and the bearings purged with fresh grease. In humid, dusty, or corrosive atmospheres, rotate the fan and
purge the bearings once a month. Under normal conditions, this procedure should be repeated once every three months.
June 2001
 INSTALLATION
EFFECT OF INSTALLATION ON PERFORMANCE
Any installation with inlet or discharge configurations that deviate from these recommendations may result in reduced fan
performance. Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can cause pre-rotation of incoming air or uneven loading of the fan
prop yielding large system losses and increased sound levels. Free discharge or turbulent flow in the discharge ductwork
will also result in system effect losses.

The most common inlet and discharge conditions which affect fan performance are:
INLET DUCT TURNS DISCHARGE DUCT TURNS

Poor

1 Fan
Wheel
Dia.

Turning
Vanes
Length of Straight Duct

Good Poor

Good

Installation of a duct turn or elbow too close to the fan inlet
reduces fan performance because air is loaded unevenly into
the fan prop. To achieve full fan performance there should
be at least one to two fan prop diameters between the turn
or elbow and the fan inlet.
Fan performance is reduced when duct turns are made
immediately off the fan discharge. To achieve cataloged
fan performance, there should be at least one equivalent
duct diameter of straight ductwork between the fan
discharge and any duct turns.

TYPICAL INSTALLATIONS - WITH MOUNTING BRACKETS

Following are typical mounting installations for models with mounting brackets. Diagrams show dimensions for ceiling hung
installations, the dimensions for floor or base mount installations are mirror images of these. For TBI's with motor in the 3 or
9 o'clock position or vertical installations, additional mounting rails are recommended. Mounting rail dimensions are shown
for field fabrication.

Horizontal Vertical
B
D C
A B C

Optional
Mounting
Rails g

Optional
Mounting
Rails

Motor at 3 or 9 o’clock position

Mounting Hole Locations
Unit Level Identification - Refer to TBI/TDI A B C D
fan name plate Fan Belt Direct Belt Drive Direct Drive Belt Belt
Example: TBI-3L42 (level 3) Size Drive Drive Level 3 Level 4/5 Level 3 Level 4/5 Drive Drive
TBI-4H30 (level 4) 18 17.63 17.63 17.38 21.38 13.38 21.38 26.00 28.00
20 19.00 19.00 17.38 22.38 14.38 21.38 28.50 29.25
24 21.88 21.88 18.38 23.38 14.38 21.38 33.00 33.75
GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410 30 26.13 26.13 19.38 28.38 16.38 25.88 37.00 38.75
PH. 715-359-6171
® www.greenheck.com
36 30.50 30.50 21.88 26.88 13.88 23.38 44.00 47.00
MODEL 42 34.75 34.75 22.88 31.88 19.88 26.38 50.00 51.25
S/N 48 42.00 42.00 25.38 36.38 19.38 31.38 56.00 61.00
MARK 54 46.75 46.75 29.88 40.38 NA 31.38 62.00 65.50
60 51.00 51.00 32.38 41.38 NA 31.38 71.00 70.00
TYPICAL HIGH TEMPERATURE CONTINUOUS DUTY INSTALLATIONS

Roof
TBI-FS with optional high temperature
construction are factory modified for operation
in high temperature continuous duty Ambient temperature
not to exceed 120∞F
applications. With propeller on the discharge
end of the fan, negative pressure is created in
the belt tube during operation. Ambient air is
drawn in through the belt tube and cools the Duct to heat source
belts and bearings.
Minimum duct
Airflow at discharge
For the greatest amount of internal cooling,
discharge static pressure should be kept to a
minimum while keeping most of the pressure
on the inlet side. Locate the fan at ends of the
duct runs and near the discharge point in the Cooling air for
drives and
system. This set-up will promote the ambient bearings
air cooling effect.

Wall and/or ceiling should enclose

fan when used for emergency heat
OPERATION and smoke exhaust.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
Before electrical connections are made, the supply voltage, phase and ampere capacity must be checked for compatibility
with the fan motor. In addition, the supply wiring must be properly fused and conform to local and national electrical codes.
The supply wires are then connected to an optional safety disconnect switch (if supplied) or wired directly to the motor.

PRE-START UP CHECKS
1. Check all fasteners for tightness. This includes motor bolts, bearing bolts, and any set screws or locking collars attaching
the propeller to the shaft and shaft to the bearings.
2. Prop rotation should be in the same direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit. For 3-phase installations, fan
rotation can be reversed by simply interchanging any two of the three electrical leads. For single phase installations,
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
3. (Belt Drive) Adjustable motor pulleys are preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan speed can be increased by
closing or decreased by opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an
equal number of turns open or closed.
Note: Any change, increase or decrease, in fan speed can represent a substantial increase in
horsepower required from the motor. Always check motor load amperage and compare to name plate
rating when changing fan speed.

MAINTENANCE

WARNING
Disconnect and secure to the “OFF” position all electrical power to the fan prior to inspection or
servicing. Failure to comply with this safety precaution could result in serious injury or death.

Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic maintenance program should be set up to preserve the reliability and
performance of the fan. Items to be included in this program are:
• BEARINGS • SET SCREWS • BELTS
• LUBRICATION • FASTENERS • REMOVAL OF DUST/DIRT
BEARINGS (Belt Drive)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals. Locking collars and set
screws, in addition to fasteners attaching the bearing to the bearing plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperature above 32º F (0º C) and below 200º F (93º C), fan shaft bearings with grease fittings should be
lubricated semi-annually using a high quality lithium based grease. If unusual environmental conditions exist such as
temperatures below 32º F (0º C) and above 200º F (93º C), moisture or contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with a manual grease gun. Be careful not to unseat the seal by over lubricating
or using excessive pressure. Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for life.
BELTS (Belt Drive) Deflection = Belt Span
64
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by improper belt tension (either too tight or
too loose) or misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating a V-belt is the lowest
tension at which the belts will not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection half-way between pulley centers is 1/64” for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches, the belt deflection should be one inch
using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint of the drive (Fig. 2).
Belt Span
Check belt tension two times during the first 24 hours of operation and periodically
thereafter. To adjust belt tension, simply pivot the motor on the motor plate. Use the Fig. 2
bolts in the slotted brackets and adjustment rods with bolts as adjustment points until
proper belt tension is attained.
It is very important that the drive pulleys remain in proper alignment after adjustments
are made. Misalignment of pulleys will result in premature belt wear, noise, vibration
and power loss (Fig. 3).

FASTENERS AND SET SCREWS (Belt & Direct Drive) Fig. 3

A periodic inspection should include checking all fasteners and set screws for tightness.
Particular attention should be paid to set screws and locking collars attaching the propeller
to the shaft and the shaft to the bearings. Loose bearing set screws and locking collars will lead to premature failure of the
fan shaft.
MOTOR LUBRICATION (Belt & Direct Drive)
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors installed on the smaller fans
are lubricated for life and require no further attention. Greasing of motors is intended only when fittings are provided.
Motors equipped with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor. Use
a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease fittings should be
greased according to directions printed on the motor.
REMOVAL OF DUST AND DIRT (Belt & Direct Drive)
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing, contaminates bearing lubricant, and collects on the impeller causing
severe imbalance if left unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor and impeller should be thoroughly cleaned periodically.
Use caution and do not allow water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings. Under no circumstances should motors or
bearings be sprayed with steam or water.

PARTS LIST
MOTOR MOTOR
PULLEY MOTOR
COVER
MOTOR (OPTIONAL)
Each fan bears a PLATE BELT
manufacturer's PROPELLER
nameplate with model BELT
number and serial TUBE
BEARING
number embossed. This SUPPORT
information in addition SHAFT
to the shown parts PULLEY
diagram will assist the
local Greenheck BEARING
representative and the COVER
factory in providing
service and replacement
MOUNTING
parts. BRACKETS BEARINGS SHAFT
(Qty. of 4)

Warranty
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the
purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option when returned
to our factory, transportation prepaid.
Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective
during this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for
any removal or installation costs.

IOM TBI TDI

Copyright © 2001 Greenheck Fan Corp. Rev. 1 June 2001
 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

Control Building # Ventilation Fans & AC Units

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 Serving area: Control bldg Basement cable room
Qty: 3
Selected Model: SBCE-3H36- 10
Capacity : 13351 m3/hr
Exhaust Fan
PN 471755


Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 50AZ/UZ
Packaged Rooftop Cooling
Only Units and Heat Pumps
Serving area : Control building Battery & Relay room
Selected model: 50AZ028
Capacity: 23.5 T.R
Qty : 2 working + 2 Stand by

Carrier is participating in the

(XURYHQW&HUWLÀFDWLRQ3URJUDPPH
Products are as listed in the
(XURYHQW'LUHFWRU\RI&HUWLÀHG
3URGXFWV

Installation, operation and maintenance instructions

 CONTENTS

START-UP CHECKLIST..................................................... 3 START-UP............................................................................ 20

Heat pump operation - defrost cycle (50UZ units only) ....... 20
PHYSICAL DATA............................................................. 4, 5 Initial checks ......................................................................... 20

ELECTRICAL DATA....................................................... 4, 5 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION................... 20

DIMENSIONS.................................................................... 6-9 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT .................................. 20

Service area........................................................................... 10 Description of unit protection devices .................................. 20
Centre of gravity (approx.) ................................................... 10 High pressurestat................................................................... 20
Weight distribution (approx.)................................................ 10 Operating limits .................................................................... 20

FAN PERFORMANCE ................................................. 11-13 SETTING UP PRO-DIALOG PLUS CONTROL ........... 21

RECOMMENDED WIRE SECTIONS ............................ 14
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS.......................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................................ 14
Siting the unit........................................................................ 14
Rigging.................................................................................. 14
Unit base frame ..................................................................... 15
Sensor location...................................................................... 16
Ductwork............................................................................... 16
Condensate and rainwater drainage ...................................... 16
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS...................................... 17
Inserting line power leads into unit....................................... 17
Thermostat connection.......................................................... 17
Necessary checks/precautions before start-up ...................... 18
VERIFICATION OF REFRIGERANT CHARGE ......... 18
Refrigerant guidelines........................................................... 18
Recharging liquid refrigerant ................................................ 19
Undercharge .......................................................................... 19
Characteristics of R407C ...................................................... 19
Local interface general features ............................................ 21
Standard human interface ..................................................... 21
Optional enhanced human interface...................................... 22
Unit start/stop control ........................................................... 23
Menus.................................................................................... 24
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES ...................................... 24
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ........................................... 25
SERVICE............................................................................. 25
Indoor fan air adjustment ...................................................... 25
Lubrication............................................................................ 25
Condenser coil ...................................................................... 26
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME ................................... 26
Maintenance instructions ...................................................... 26
Maintenance schedule........................................................... 26
Description of maintenance operations................................. 27
Servicing recommendations.................................................. 28
FINAL RECOMMENDATIONS....................................... 28
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART...................................... 28

Serving area : Control building Battery & Relay room

Selected model: 50AZ028
Capacity: 23.5 T.R
Qty : 2 working + 2 Stand by

The drawings in this document are for illustrative purposes only and is not part of any offer for sale or contract.

2
START-UP CHECK LIST Start up date: ..................................................................

Equipment sold by: ..................................................................................................................... Contract No: ..................................................................

Installed by: ................................................................................................................................. Contract No: .................................................................

Site address: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment type and serial No: 50AZ ....................................................................................................................................................................................

50UZ ...................................................................................................................................................................................

ELECTRICAL DATA:

Supply voltage Ph 1: ........................... Volts Ph 2: .................... Volts Ph 3: ................... Volts

Nominal voltage: ...................................................... Volts % network voltage: ..................................................................

Current draw Ph 1: ................................ Amperes Ph 2: ................................... Amperes Ph 3: ...................................... Amperes

Control circuit voltage: ................................ Volts Control circuit fuse: ............................................................................................ Amperes

Main circuit breaker rating: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................

PHYSICAL DATA:
Condenser: Evaporator:

o o
Entering air temp.: ...................................................... C Entering air temp.: ....................................................... C
o o
Leaving air temp.: ...................................................... C Leaving air temp.: ....................................................... C

Pressure drop (air): .................................................... kPa Pressure drop (air): ...................................................... kPa

Discharge air pressure: ............................................ Pa Discharge air pressure: ............................................... Pa

Fan motor input: Ph. 1: ................................. Volts Fan motor input: Ph. 1: ................................... Volts

Ph. 2: ................................. Volts Ph. 2: ................................... Volts

Ph. 3: ................................. Volts Ph. 3: ................................... Volts

SAFETY DEVICE SETTING:

High pressure switch: cut-out: ................................................... kPa cut-in: ............................................................... kPa

Low pressure switch: cut-out: ................................................... kPa cut-in: ............................................................... kPa

Step controller: cut-out 1st step: ....................................... oC cut-in 1st step: ................................................. oC

cut-out 2nd step: ..................................... oC cut-in 2 nd step: .............................................. oC

Oil level: ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Oil visible in sight glass? ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................

ACCESSORIES

Commissioning engineer (name): ............................................................................................................................................................................................

Customer agreement

Name: .......................................................................................... Date: ...............................................................................................................

Remarks:

Note: Complete this start-up list at the time of installation

3
 Table 1 - Physical data - 50UZ
50UZ 016 020 024 028 038 042
Nominal cooling capacity* N:      
Nominal heating capacity** N:      
Operating weight NJ      
Refrigerant charge   5&
&LUFXLW$ NJ      
&LUFXLW% NJ      
Compressor Scroll Hermetic Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Quantity, circuit A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Quantity, circuit B - 1 1 1 1 1
2LOFKDUJHHDFK O      
Control type Pro-Dialog Plus
Indoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV 
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Outdoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV 
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Indoor fan One, centrifugal
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXW N:      
1RPLQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHGU\ZHWFRLO 3D      
Outdoor fan Axial Flying Bird fans with rotating shroud
Quantity 1 2 2 2 2 2
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHGKLJKORZVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXWHDFK N:      
$LUÀOWHU Washable
Quantity 4 4 4 4 4 4
:LGWK[KHLJKW PP [ [ [ [ [ [
Thickness mm 15 15 15 15 15 15
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&
** Nominal Eurovent conditions: outdoor air wet bulb temperature of 6o&LQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&

Table 2 - Electrical data - 50UZ

50UZ† 016 020 024 028 038 042
Nominal supply 9SK+] 
Voltage range V
0LQ       
0D[       
Nominal power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Effective power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Nominal current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Effective current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Maximum power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Maximum current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Starting current $      
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&LQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
 %DVHGRQDQRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&   
%DVHGRQDQRXWGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&DQGDQLQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
† Standard unit (without any options and accessories)

4
 Table 3 - Physical data - 50AZ

50AZ 016 020 024 028 034 040

Nominal cooling capacity* N:      
Operating weight NJ      
Refrigerant charge  5&
&LUFXLW$ NJ      
&LUFXLW% NJ      
Compressor Scroll Hermetic Scroll Scroll Hermetic Hermetic
Quantity, circuit A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Quantity, circuit B - 1 1 1 1 1
2LOFKDUJHHDFK O      
Control type Pro-Dialog Plus
Indoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV
Face area m2       
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Outdoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Indoor fan One, centrifugal
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXW N:      
1RPLQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHGU\ZHWFRLO 3D      
Outdoor fan Axial Flying Bird fans with rotating shroud
Quantity 1 2 2 2 2 2
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHGKLJKORZVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXWHDFK N:      
$LUÀOWHU Washable
Quantity 4 4 4 4 4 4
:LGWK[KHLJKW PP [ [ [ [ [ [
Thickness mm 15 15 15 15 15 15
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&

Table 4 - Electrical data - 50AZ

50AZ*** 016 020 024 028 034 040
Nominal supply 9SK+] 
Voltage range V
0LQ       
0D[       
Nominal power input* N:      
Effective power input* N:      
Nominal current drawn* $      
Effective current drawn* $      
Maximum power input** N:      
Maximum current drawn** $      
Starting current $      
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&
** Based on an outdoor air dry bulb temperature of 46o&
*** Standard unit (without any options and accessories)

Electrical data notes:

‡ $=8=XQLWVKDYHDVLQJOHSRZHUFRQQHFWLRQSRLQWORFDWHGDWWKHPDLQ  7KHRSHUDWLQJHQYLURQPHQWLVVSHFLÀHGEHORZ
VZLWFK  D (QYLURQPHQW
(QYLURQPHQWDVFODVVLÀHGLQ(1FRUUHVSRQGVWR
• The control box includes the following standard features: ,(&
- a main disconnect switch, starter and motor protection devices for each - outdoor installation (IP24)
compressor, fans and electrical heater option    DPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHUDQJHƒ&WRƒ&
- the control devices - altitude: bP
• Field connections:  E &RPSHWHQFHRISHUVRQQHOFODVV%$WUDLQHGSHUVRQQHO,(&
All connections to the system and the electrical installations must be in full  3RZHUVXSSO\IUHTXHQF\YDULDWLRQ“+]
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKDOODSSOLFDEOHORFDOFRGHV  7KHQHXWUDO1FRQGXFWRUPXVWQRWEHFRQQHFWHGGLUHFWO\WRWKHXQLWLI
‡ 7KH&DUULHU$=8=XQLWVDUHGHVLJQHGDQGEXLOWWRHQVXUHFRQIRUPDQFH QHFHVVDU\XVHDWUDQVIRUPHU
ZLWKWKHVHFRGHV7KHUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVRI(XURSHDQVWDQGDUG(1  2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQRIWKHSRZHUVXSSO\FRQGXFWRUVLVQRWSURYLGHGZLWK
(machine safety - electrical machine components - part 1: general regulations - WKHXQLW
FRUUHVSRQGVWR,(&DUHVSHFLÀFDOO\WDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWZKHQ  7KHIDFWRU\LQVWDOOHGGLVFRQQHFWVZLWFKHVFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVLVDUHRIDW\SH
GHVLJQLQJWKHHOHFWULFDOHTXLSPHQW VXLWDEOHIRUSRZHULQWHUUXSWLRQLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK(1
NOTES:
‡ *HQHUDOO\WKHUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVRI,(&DUHDFFHSWHGDVFRPSOLDQFH
ZLWKWKHUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKHLQVWDOODWLRQGLUHFWLYHV&RQIRUPDQFHZLWK(1
LVWKHEHVWPHDQVRIHQVXULQJFRPSOLDQFHZLWKWKH0DFKLQHV'LUHFWLYH
†
‡ $QQH[%RI(1GHVFULEHVWKHHOHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVXVHGIRUWKH
RSHUDWLRQRIWKHPDFKLQHV
 7KHXQLWVDUHGHVLJQHGIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR71QHWZRUNV,(&)RU,7
QHWZRUNVWKHHDUWKFRQQHFWLRQPXVWQRWEHDWWKHQHWZRUNHDUWK3URYLGHD
local earth, consult competent local organisations to complete the electrical
LQVWDOODWLRQ
Caution: If particular aspects of an actual installation do not conform to the
conditions described above, or if there are other conditions which should be
considered, always contact your local Carrier representative.
5
 Fig. 1 - Dimensions, mm

50AZ/UZ 016

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view Front view

Control wiring inlet

(1) Optional air return duct connection Water connections

(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLV
FDVHSRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

6
50AZ/UZ 020

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view
Front view
(1) Optional air return duct connection
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
Control wiring inlet
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLVFDVH
SRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG
Water connections

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

7
50AZ/UZ 024-028

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view
Front view
(1) Optional air return duct connection Control wiring inlet
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLV Water connections
FDVHSRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

8
50AZ 034-040/50UZ 038-042

Electrical box
access panel
Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view

Left side view

Rear view Front view

(1) Optional air return duct connection
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFW
FRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLVFDVHSRZHU Control wiring inlet
H[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG
Water connections

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

9
 Fig. 2 - Service area, mm

 PP,IWKHXQLWLQFRUSRUDWHVWKHRSWLRQDOHOHFWULFKHDWHURUWKHRSWLRQDO
hot water coil, or they are to be installed in the future, this clearance should
EHPP

Fig. 3 - Centre of gravity (approx.)

50AZ 016 020 024 028 034 040

XG* mm      
YG* mm      
ZG* mm      
* Measured from point Ñ

50UZ 016 020 024 028 038 042

XG* mm      
YG* mm      
ZG* mm      
* Measured from point Ñ

Fig. 4 - Weight distribution, kg (approx.)

50AZ 016 020 024 028

Å    
Ç    
É    
Ñ    
Ö    
Ü    

50UZ 016 020 024 028

Å    
Ç    
É    
Ñ    
Ö    
Ü    
NOTE: The units have mounting holes in the lower section, to
EHXVHGE\WKHLQVWDOOHULIUHTXLUHG

50AZ 034 040 50UZ 038 042

Å   Å  
Ç   Ç  
É 252 251 É  
Ñ 221 222 Ñ  
Ö   Ö  
Ü   Ü  
á 252 251 á  
à 221 222 à  

10
 Table 5.1 - Fan performance (standard)

50AZ/UZ 016 50AZ/UZ 020

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV    
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333 3611 3944
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN: Standard motor: 4 kW

50AZ/UZ 024 50AZ/UZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 3888 4166 pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166 4750
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4 turns open 3D      ² 4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:      ² UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D      ² 4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:      ² UV N:      ²
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:     6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042*

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 6111 pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 6111
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN: 6WDQGDUGPRWRU$=N:8=N:

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 7KHVKDGHGDUHDVGRQRWDSSO\WRWKH8=
kW - Fan power input

Higher than the nominal motor power

11
 Table 5.2 - Fan performance (optional drive - high static pressure)
50AZ/UZ 016 50AZ/UZ 020
0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV    
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333 3611 3944
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
Standard motor: 4 kW 6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:    

50AZ/UZ 024 50AZ/UZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 3888 pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166
Closed 3D      Closed 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
1 turn open 3D      1 turn open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
2 turns open 3D      2 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
3 turns open 3D      3 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
4 turns open 3D      4 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
4.5 turns open 3D      4.5 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:    6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:   

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5833 6111 6388 pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5833 6111 6388
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
Standard motor: 11 kW Standard motor: 11 kW

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 
kW - Fan power input

Higher than the nominal motor power

12
 Table 5.3 - Fan performance (optional drive - low static pressure)
50AZ/UZ 016 50UZ/AZ 020
0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333
Closed Pa       Closed 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open  3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:       6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

50UZ/AZ 024 50UZ/AZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV
Pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 Pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166
Closed 3D       Closed 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
2 turns open  3D       2 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
4 turns open  3D       4 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
Standard motor: 4 kW Standard motor: 4 kW

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042

0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV
Pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 Pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695
Closed 3D       Closed 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open  3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4 turns open  3D       4 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:       6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 
kW - Fan power input

13
RECOMMENDED WIRE SECTIONS
Wire sizing is the responsibility of the installer, and depends on
the characteristics and regulations applicable to each installation
site. The following is only to be used as a guideline, and does
not make Carrier in any way liable. After wire sizing has been
FRPSOHWHGXVLQJWKHFHUWLÀHGGLPHQVLRQDOGUDZLQJWKHLQVWDO
OHUPXVWHQVXUHHDV\FRQQHFWLRQDQGGHÀQHDQ\PRGLÀFDWLRQV
necessary on site. The connections provided as standard for the
ÀHOGVXSSOLHGSRZHUHQWU\FDEOHVWRWKHJHQHUDOGLVFRQQHFW
isolator switch are designed for the number and type of wires,
listed in the table below.
The calculations are based on the maximum machine current
(see electrical data tables) and the standard installation practises,
in accordance with IEC 60364, table 52C.
- The calculation is based on PVC Cu.
- A maximum ambient temperature of 46°C has been taken
into consideration.
IMPORTANT: Before connection of the main power cables
(L1 - L2 - L3) on the terminal block, it is imperative to check
the correct order of the 3 phases before proceeding to the
connection on the main disconnect/isolator switch.
Only for use when repairing "Original Spare Parts". For
repairs, special attention must be paid to the correct installa-
tion of the spare parts. The parts must always be installed in
their original position.
During unit operation, some of the refrigerant circuit elements
could reach a temperature in excess of 70°C so only trained
RUTXDOLÀHGSHUVRQQHOVKRXOGDFFHVVDUHDVSURWHFWHGE\DFFHVV
panels.
This unit should not be installed in an explosive atmosphere.
The unit can operate in normal radioelectric atmospheres in
residential, commercial and light industrial installations. For
other applications, please consult Carrier.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect shipment. Inspect the unit. If it is damaged, or if
WKHVKLSPHQWLVLQFRPSOHWHLPPHGLDWHO\ÀOHDFODLPZLWK
the shipping company.
2. Check that the local power supply agrees with the
VSHFLÀFDWLRQRQWKHXQLWQDPHSODWH
Siting the unit

- The given wire length limits the voltage drop to < 5% Check the following points:
(length L in metres - see table below). - The location must be able to support the unit operating
weight (see Table 1 and 3).
FLA S min. (mm2) Cable type L (mm)  $OORZVXIÀFLHQWVSDFHIRUVHUYLFLQJDQGDLUÁRZDURXQG
by phase
the unit (see Fig. 2).
 [ 39&&X 
 [ 39&&X  - Select a location free of dust or foreign matter which may
 [ 39&&X  cause coil clogging.
 [ 39&&X 
 [ 39&&X 
- When installing the unit on the ground, select a site which
 [ 39&&X  LVQRWVXEMHFWWRÁRRGLQJ
 [ 39&&X  - Consult all applicable rules and standards which govern
 [ 39&&X 
the installation of air conditioning equipment.
FLA - Full load current, A
- Vibration absorbers should be provided throughout the
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS installation to prevent noise transmission.

Installation and servicing of air conditioning equipment can be Rigging

hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components.
2QO\WUDLQHGDQGTXDOLÀHGVHUYLFHSHUVRQQHOVKRXOGLQVWDOOVWDUW
up or service air conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel
can perform the basic maintenance functions of cleaning and
UHSODFLQJÀOWHUV$OORWKHURSHUDWLRQVVKRXOGEHSHUIRUPHGE\
trained service personnel. When working on air conditioning
equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels
attached to the unit and other safety precautions that may apply.
1. Use a hoisting chain with a minimum length of 5 m and a
suitable rigging hook to lift the unit (see Fig. 5).
2. To prevent damage while in transit, do not remove the unit
IURPWKHVNLGXQWLOLWLVDWLWVÀQDOORFDWLRQ
3. Never roll or tip the unit more than 15o.
IMPORTANT:0DNHVXUHWKDWDOOXQLWSDQHOVDUHÀ[HGLQ
place before moving. Raise and set down the unit carefully.

Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.
Use a quenching cloth for unbrazing operations.

WARNING: Before performing service or maintenance

operations on the unit, turn off the main power switch to the
unit. Electrical shock could cause personal injury.

This unit is designed for ducted installation (indoor air

discharge). If ducts are not used the installer must place a
protection grille in the discharge.

14
 Fig. 5 - Rigging Fig. 6 - Hole for ducts (standard unit)

50AZ/UZ 016-020

PP AIR IN

AIR OUT

50AZ/UZ 024-028

50AZ/UZ a b c d e f g h i j k
PP

          
           

Fig. 7 - Standard discharge and return

50AZ 034-040/50UZ 038-042

PP

See note
Roof slab See note

Air inlet Air outlet

NOTE: Do not drill in this area as damage to basepan and refrigerant lines may
UHVXOWLQZDWHUOHDNDJH

Alternatively, the return air can enter through the rear section
(see Fig. 8). In this case, remove the panel and place it on the
lower section.

Fig. 8 - Return air through unit rear

Unit base frame

Due to the size and weight of the units the base frame must be on
VRPHNLQGRIVXSSRUWZKLFKIXOÀOVWKHIROORZLQJUHTXLUHPHQWV
 7KHVXUIDFHDUHDPXVWEHVXIÀFLHQWIRUGLVWULEXWLQJWKHXQLW
weight over the building structure.
 6XIÀFLHQWGUDLQKROHVVKRXOGEHSURYLGHGWRDYRLGWKH
accumulation of rainwater. Air inlet

 7KHXQLWVKRXOGEHÀUPO\À[HGWRWKHÁRRU
- The structure should be capable of supporting the unit See note
Roof slab See note
weight during installation and operation.
- The standard unit leaves the factory with the air discharge Air outlet
and return in the lower section (see Fig. 7) and the corres-
ponding holes in the support (see Fig. 6) must be made.

15
The unit air discharge and return can be effected through the
side (Fig. 9). In this case, the optional roof curb must be used
after placing the panel covering the return area in the lower
section.
Fig. 9 - Front discharge and return
Air inlet
See note See note
Roof slab -
Air outlet ÀHOGVXSSOLHG
Roof slab
It is necessary to use adequate sealants and joints to ensure
FRUUHFWÀWWLQJDQGZDWHUWLJKWQHVVEHWZHHQWKHGXFWVDQGWKH
support so that air and moisture do not enter the building.
WARNING: Do not drill any holes in the indoor coil area as
this might damage the condensate drain pan.
IMPORTANT: The unit should be correctly levelled to avoid
drainage problems.
Sensor location
Criteria for selecting sensor locations will vary with system
DQGEXLOGLQJVSHFLÀFV5HFRPPHQGHGVHQVRUORFDWLRQVDUH
Ductwork
The ductwork dimensions should be determined in accordance
ZLWKWKHDLUÁRZWREHFDUULHGDQGWKHDYDLODEOHVWDWLFSUHVVXUH
RIWKHXQLW7KHGLIIHUHQWDLUÁRZVDQGVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVZKLFK
each unit can supply, are shown in the fan performance tables.
It is recommended to observe the following considerations:
- Whatever type of ductwork is used, it should not be made
RIPDWHULDOVZKLFKDUHÁDPPDEOHRUZKLFKJLYHRIIWR[LF
JDVHVLQWKHHYHQWRIDÀUH7KHLQWHUQDOVXUIDFHVVKRXOGEH
smooth, and not contaminate the air which passes through.
It is recommended to use sheet metal ducts which are
adequately insulated to avoid condensation and thermal
leakage.
- At the points where the ducts join the unit, it is recom-
PHQGHGWRXVHÁH[LEOHFRQQHFWLRQVZKLFKDEVRUEYLEUD
tions, prevent noise inside the ductwork and allow access
to the unit.
- Bends near the unit outlet should be avoided as much
as possible. If unavoidable, they should be as slight as
SRVVLEOHDQGLQWHUQDOGHÁHFWRUVVKRXOGEHXVHGZKHQWKH
duct has large dimensions.
NOTE: All duct sizing and design work should be carried out
E\TXDOLÀHGWHFKQLFLDQV
Condensate and rainwater drainage
The units incorporate drillholes in the base near the outdoor
coils to drain rainwater and condensation. The indoor heat
exchanger area incorporates a condensate pan with an outside
drain pipe diameter of 23 mm, and a 35 mm diameter drillhole
must be made in the support (see Fig. 11).
Fig. 11 - Condensate drain details
shown in Fig. 10. 'UDLQSLSHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU2'
1. Outdoor temperature sensor
2. Space (ambient) temperature sensor
3. Supply temperature sensor

(2*) if the space temperature sensor is used in a duct, the space

temperature sensor must be selected as same type of supply
temperature sensor.

Fig. 10 - Sensor location

'ULOOKROHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU2'

A drain pipe for evacuating condensate must be incorporated

taking into account the following recommendations:
- Use galvanized steel, copper or plastic piping. Do not use
ordinary garden hose material.
Roof slab - If a rigid material has been used for the drain pipe, it is
necessary to provide an elastic coupling in the drainage
line to absorb possible vibrations.
- It is recommended to incorporate a trap of the appropriate
dimensions (see Fig. 12).
Air outlet
- The drain pipe should always be below the connection
Air inlet itself, and should slope to facilitate drainage.

16
 Fig. 12 - Condensate drain pipe details Example:
Nominal supply: 400-3-50
'UDLQSLSHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU
AB = 404 V
BC = 399 V Motor
AC = 394 V

404 + 399 + 394 = 399 = 400 V

Average voltage =
3

Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:

AB = 404 - 400 = 4
BC = 400 - 399 = 1
Field-supplied AC = 400 - 394 = 6

Largest deviation is 6 volts. Percentage voltage imbalance is

therefore:

6
x 100 = 1.5 %
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 400

WARNING: To prevent electrical shock or equipment This is less than the permissible 2% and is therefore acceptable.
damage, make sure disconnects are open before electrical
connections are made. If this action is not taken, personal CAUTION: The installer must install protection devices, as
injury may occur. required by the applicable legislation.

Field wiring must comply with all applicable codes. Inserting line power leads into unit

Take special care when making the earth connection. Install air-tight duct conduits in the front panel knock-outs.

Voltage to the unit must be within 2% of the voltage and 10%
of the current indicated on the nameplate. Contact your local
power company for correction of an incorrect line voltage.
Check the voltage before selecting supply wiring fuses and
controls.
WARNING: Operation of the chiller with an improper supply
voltage or excessive phase imbalance constitutes abuse which
will invalidate the Carrier warranty. If the phase imbalance
exceeds 2% for voltage, or 10% for current, contact your local
electricity supply source at once and ensure that the chiller is
not switched on until corrective measures have been taken.
IMPORTANT: To ensure the correct unit power supply
(cable entry, conductor cross section, protection devices etc.),
consult the electrical data table, the wiring diagram supplied
with the unit and the applicable standards concerning the
installation of air conditioning equipment.
Never operate a unit if the voltage imbalance exceeds 2%. The
following formula must be used to determine the percentage of
voltage imbalance.
Voltage imbalance % =
Route all wires through the conduits to terminal blocks in the
control box.
Use copper, copper-clad aluminium or aluminium wire for
power supply.
Thermostat connection
Thermostat/unit connection must be via a loom (wire cross
section depends on the cable length) manufactured in
accordance with the wiring diagram accompanying the unit.
Follow the instructions supplied with the control for thermostat
assembly and handling.
The general rules below should be taken into account:
- Voltage at 24 V AC
- Standard outlet (service C, R, G, Y1/W2,Y1, Y/Y2, O/W2,
W/W1)
- Outlet O is active on cooling
NOTE 1: The thermostat cables should be separate from any
230 V or 400 V cable.

Largest deviation from average voltage

Average voltage

17
Necessary checks/precautions before start-up Refrigerant guidelines

- Ensure that all electrical connections are properly Refrigeration installations must be inspected and maintained
tightened. regularly and rigorously by specialists. Their activities must be
- Ensure that the unit is level and well-supported. overseen and checked by properly trained people. To minimise
- Check the condition of the ductwork in case damage has discharge to the atmosphere, refrigerants and lubricating oil
occurred during installation. must be transferred using methods which reduce leaks and
 7KHDLUÀOWHUVKRXOGEHFOHDQDQGLQSODFH losses to a minimum and with materials that are suitable for the
 $OOWKHSDQHOVVKRXOGEHÀWWHGDQGÀUPO\VHFXUHGZLWKWKH products.
corresponding screws. • Leaks must be repaired immediately
 0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHUHLVVXIÀFLHQWVSDFHIRUVHUYLFLQJDQG • All units are equipped with connections on the suction
maintenance purposes. and liquid line, which permit the connection of refrigerant
- Check the drain connections. recovery valves.
- Ensure that there are no refrigerant leaks. • If the residual pressure is too low to make the transfer
 &RQÀUPWKDWWKHHOHFWULFDOSRZHUVRXUFHDJUHHVZLWKWKH alone, a purpose-built refrigerant recovery unit must be
unit nameplate rating. used.
 0DNHVXUHWKDWFRPSUHVVRUVÁRDWIUHHO\RQWKHPRXQWLQJ • Compressor lubricating oil contains refrigerant. Any oil
springs. drained from a system during maintenance must therefore
be handled and stored accordingly.
WARNING: The compressors are mounted on vibration • Refrigerant under pressure must never be discharged to
isolators. Do not loosen or remove the support mounting the atmosphere.
bolts. • If the refrigerant circuit is opened, plug all openings if the
operation takes up to one day, or charge the circuit with
- Check for proper fan rotation. nitrogen for longer operations.

VERIFICATION OF THE REFRIGERANT CHARGE Apparent and actual subcooling

CAUTION: The 50AZ/UZ units are supplied with a precise 5 4

refrigerant charge (see Physical Data table). 2
3
1
To verify the correct system charge prodeed as follows:
Set unit to cooling mode.
Ensure that no bubbles appear in the sight-glass, when operat-
L 6
ing the unit at full load for a while, at a saturated condensing V
temperature of between 52 and 54°C. If necessary cover a sec-
tion of the coil surface to obtain this condensing temperature.
Pressure

Under these conditions the apparent subcooling which is equal L+V

to the saturated condensing temperature (1 - on the saturated
dew point curve) minus the liquid refrigerant temperature
(3) ahead of the expansion device must be between 8 and
10°C. This corresponds to an actual subcooling temperature
of between 3 and 5 K at the condenser outlet, depending on Enthalpy
the unit type. Actual subcooling is equal the saturated liquid
Legend
temperature (2 - on the saturated bubble point curve) minus
the liquid refrigerant temperature (3) ahead of the expansion 1 Saturated condensing temperature at the dew point
 6DWXUDWHGOLTXLGWHPSHUDWXUHDWWKHEXEEOHSRLQW
device. Use the pressure tap supplied on the liquid piping to  /LTXLGUHIULJHUDQWWHPSHUDWXUH
FKDUJHUHIULJHUDQWDQGWRÀQGRXWWKHSUHVVXUHRIWKHOLTXLG 4 Saturation curve at the dew point
5 Saturation curbe at the bubble point
refrigerant. If the subcooling value is not correct, i.e. lower 6 Isotherms
WKDQWKHVSHFLÀHGYDOXHVDOHDNGHWHFWLRQWHVWPXVWEHFDUULHG  $SSDUHQWVXEFRROLQJ
out on the unit, as it no longer contains its original charge.  5HDOVXEFRROLQJ
/ /LTXLG
/9 /LTXLGYDSRXU
WARNING: To ensure proper operation of 50AZ/UZ V Vapour

units there must be at least 8 K of subcooling as the liquid

refrigerant enters the expansion valve.

The 50AZ/UZ units use refrigerant. For your information,

ZHDUHUHSURGXFLQJKHUHVRPHH[WUDFWVIURPWKHRIÀFLDO
publication dealing with the design, installation, operation
and maintenance of air conditioning and refrigeration
systems and the training of people involved in these activities,
agreed by the air conditioning and refrigeration industry.

18
Recharging liquid refrigerant Undercharge

CAUTION: 50AZ/UZ units are charged with liquid HFC- If there is not enough refrigerant in the system, this is indicated
407C refrigerant. by gas bubbles in the moisture sight glass in the cooling mode.

This non-azeotropic refrigerant blend consists of 23% R-32, ,IWKHXQGHUFKDUJHLVVLJQLÀFDQWODUJHEXEEOHVDSSHDULQWKH

25% of R-125 and 52% R-134a, and is characterised by the
fact that at the time of the change in state the temperature of
the liquid/vapour mixture is not constant, as with azeotropic
refrigerants. All checks must be pressure tests, and the
appropriate pressure/temperature ratio table must be used
to determine the corresponding saturated temperatures
(saturated bubble point curve or saturated dew point curve).
moisture sight glass, and the suction pressure drops. The
compressor suction superheat is also high. The machine must
be recharged after the leak has been repaired.
Find the leak and completely drain the system with a
refrigerant recovery unit. Carry out the repair, leak test and
then recharge the system.

Leak detection is especially important for units charged with
refrigerant R-407C. Depending on whether the leak occurs
in the liquid or in the vapour phase, the proportion of the
different components in the remaining liquid is not the same.
NOTE: Regularly carry out leak checks and immediately
repair any leak found. If there is a leak in the plate heat
exchanger, this part must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: After the leak has been repaired, the circuit
must be tested, without exceeding the maximum low-side
operating pressure shown on the unit name plate.
The refrigerant must always be recharged in the liquid phase
into the liquid line.
The refrigerant cylinder must always contain at least 10% of its
initial charge.
For the refrigerant quantity per circuit, refer to the data on the
unit name plate.

Characteristics of R407C

See the table below.

Saturated bubble point temperatures (bubble point curve)
Saturated dew point temperatures (dew point curve)

Characteristics of R407C

Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew
(relative) point temp. , °C point temp., °C (relative) point temp., °C point temp., °C (relative) point temp., °C point temp., °C
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        

19
START-UP
Actual start-up should only be done under the supervision of a
TXDOLÀHGUHIULJHUDWLRQPHFKDQLF
Heat pump operation - defrost cycle (50UZ units only)
:KHQWKHRXWGRRUWHPSHUDWXUHLVVXIÀFLHQWO\ORZDQGGHSHQGLQJ
on the atmospheric humidity, the water condensing on the
RXWGRRUFRLOIUHH]HVDQGWKLVLPSHGHVFRUUHFWDLUÁRZ,WLV
necessary to remove the ice by changing over the reversing
valve on the solenoid coil. This reverses the system cycle and
injects hot gas into the outdoor heat exchanger. Defrost will be
completed when the outdoor coil reaches the set temperature or
after a predetermined period of time from the start of the cycle.
- Electrically disconnect the compressor and/or remove the
crankcase heater.
- Unbraze or unscrew the suction and discharge lines,
taking care not to damage the rest of the components.
- Remove the fastenings.
 5HSODFHWKHFRPSUHVVRUHQVXULQJWKDWLWFRQWDLQVVXIÀFLHQW
oil.
- Braze or screw in the lines.
- Connect the compressor according to the wiring diagram.
- Evacuate the compressor.
- Fill in the refrigerant charge indicated on the nameplate.
 127(7KLVRSHUDWLRQPXVWEHGRQHE\DTXDOLÀHG
technician.
Description of unit protection devices

Initial checks The unit includes the following compressor protection devices:
- Internal protector for 50AZ/UZ 016-042.
With the unit in operation, ensure that the values shown on - External protector for 50AZ 034-040.
the high and low pressure gauges are within the normal limits. - Outdoor fan motor thermomagnetic switch.
It is advisable to simulate unit shutdown due to high and low - Indoor fan motor thermomagnetic switch.
pressure, in order to make sure that the high pressure switch
works properly. To do so, proceed as follows: High pressurestat
- High pressure shutdown (cooling cycle): Completely cover
the outdoor air inlet, or disconnect the outdoor fan and This protects the unit against excessive condensing pressure.
motor. The unit should stop at a pressure of 28/29.5 bar*.
- Low pressure shutdown (cooling cycle): Cover the indoor 7KHKLJKSUHVVXUHVWDWKDVIDFWRU\À[HGQRQDGMXVWDEOHVHWWLQJV
air inlet, or disconnect the indoor fan and motor. Observe To check, see section Initial checks.
the low pressure gauge. The unit should stop at a pressure
High pressure Low pressure
of 0.55 bar. Min. Max. Min. Max.
36 EDU     
* This value only applies to 50UZ 038/042 units. 76 ƒ&     
3UHVVXUHVZLWFKFXWRXWSUHVVXUH EDU    
7HVWSUHVVXUHXQLWOHDNWHVW EDU 
Check that the motor and compressor consumptions are
7KHVHYDOXHVRQO\DSSO\WR8=XQLWV
approximately the same as those shown on the unit nameplate.
Consumption data is also given in Tables 2 and 4.
WARNING: Alteration of factory settings other than the
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION design setpoint, without manufacturer's authorisation, may
void the warranty.
The refrigerant circuit incorporates the following primary
elements: Operating limits
- Refrigerant-air heat exchanger: made of high quality
FRSSHUWXEHVDQGSUHWUHDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV These units have been designed to operate within the following
- Refrigerant lines: made completely of high quality copper. limits:
- %LÁRZH[SDQVLRQYDOYH(except 50UZ 038-042)
- Compressors: scroll compressors for 50AZ/UZ 016, 024, Table 7 - Cooling operation
028, 038, 042 and hermetic compressors for 50AZ/UZ Zone Air temperature
020 and 50AZ 034-040. Dry bulb Wet bulb
- Filter drier (50AZ and 50UZ 038-042) and obus type access Indoor
0D[LPXP ƒ& ƒ&
valve.
- Safety elements: high, low pressure transducer and high Outdoor
0D[LPXP ƒ&  
pressure switch. 0LQLPXP ƒ& 
- All units include the R-407C refrigerant charge necessary
for correct operation. Table 8 - Heat pump operation
- 50UZ 038-042 units include receivers and accumulators.
Zone Air temperature
Dry bulb Wet bulb
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
Indoor
0D[LPXP ƒ&
When an internal fault occurs, the compressor must be
Outdoor
replaced. This must be done as detailed below: 0D[LPXP ƒ& ƒ&
- Disconnect the unit from the electrical supply. 0LQLPXP ƒ& 
- Remove the panels. 8=XQLWVZLOOQRWUXQDWƒ&RXWGRRUDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQFRROLQJPRGHLI
- Remove the gas from the refrigerant circuit using recovery WKHHQWHULQJDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHLVKLJKHUWKDQƒ&7KHPD[LPXPYDOXHZLOO
WKHQEHƒ&
equipment to avoid harming the atmosphere.
20
SETTING UP PRO-DIALOG PLUS CONTROL

Local interface general features

Standard small human interface general features

The interface
It gives access to all PRO-DIALOG PLUS data and operating
functions. It consists of:
• A two-digit display showing the number of the item
selected.
• A four-digit display showing the contents of the item
selected.
• Five buttons and one alarm LED for unit start/stop, menu
selection, menu item selection and value adjustment and
alarm annunciation.

INTERFACE
BUTTON NAME DESCRIPTION
 0HQX 3HUPLWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRIDPDLQPHQX

 8SDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV

  LQFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 'RZQDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV
  GHFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 (QWHU *LYHVDFFHVVWRWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHYDOLGDWHVDPRGLÀFDWLRQRUGLVSOD\VWKHORFDWLRQLQWKHPHQXDQGH[SDQGHGLWHPGHVFULSWLRQ

 6WDUWVWRS $XWKRULVHVVWDUWRUVWRSRIWKHXQLWLQORFDOPRGHRUPRGLÀFDWLRQRILWVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

INTERFACE LEDS
LED INDICATION WHEN LIT
Red LED:
 /LWFLUFXLW$%RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP
- Flashing: circuit A, B or unit running with alarm present

21
Optional enhanced human interface general features
DUAL-CIRCUIT HEAT PUMP INTERFACE DUAL-CIRCUIT COOLING ONLY UNIT INTERFACE

MAIN INTERFACE SUMMARY INTERFACE MAIN INTERFACE SUMMARY INTERFACE

MENU BLOCK MENU BLOCK

The local interface enables a number of operating parameters to Main interface

EHGLVSOD\HGDQGPRGLÀHG It gives access to all PRO-DIALOG PLUS data and operating
functions. It consists of:
The interface consists of two distinct parts: the main interface • A two-digit display showing the number of the item
(left hand section) and the summary interface (right hand selected.
section). • A four-digit display showing the contents of the item
selected.
• LEDs and buttons for unit start/stop, menu selection,
menu item selection and value adjustment.

MAIN INTERFACE
BUTTON NAME DESCRIPTION
 0HQX 3HUPLWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRIDPDLQPHQX(DFKPDLQPHQXLVUHSUHVHQWHGE\DQLFRQ7KHLFRQLVOLWLIDFWLYH

 8SDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV

  LQFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 'RZQDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV
  GHFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 (QWHU *LYHVDFFHVVWRWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHYDOLGDWHVDPRGLÀFDWLRQRUGLVSOD\VH[SDQGHGLWHPGHVFULSWLRQ

 6WDUWVWRS $XWKRULVHVVWDUWRUVWRSRIWKHXQLWLQORFDOPRGHRUPRGLÀFDWLRQRILWVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

MAIN INTERFACE MENU LEDS

LED NAME DESCRIPTION
 ,1)250$7,21PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHJHQHUDORSHUDWLQJSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKHXQLW

 7(03(5$785(6PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHV

 kPa 35(6685(6PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWRSHUDWLQJSUHVVXUHV

 6(732,176PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWVHWSRLQWVDQGHQDEOHVWKHPWREHPRGLÀHG

 ,13876PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHVWDWXVRIWKHXQLWGLJLWDODQGDQDORJXHLQSXWV

 28738767(676PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHVWDWXVRIWKHXQLWRXWSXWVDQGHQDEOHVWKHPWREHWHVWHG

 &21),*85$7,216PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWFRQÀJXUDWLRQDQGHQDEOHVLWWREHPRGLÀHG

 $/$506PHQX 'LVSOD\VDFWLYHDODUPV

 $/$506+,6725<PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHKLVWRU\RIWKHDODUPV

 23(5$7,1*/2*PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHRSHUDWLQJWLPHVDQGQXPEHURIVWDUWVIRUWKHXQLWDQGWKHFRPSUHVVRUV

22
The summary interface (right hand section) includes a mimic The following operating types can be selected using the
diagram of the unit, together with push-buttons and LEDs. It Start/Stop button:
gives quick access to the main operating parameters of the unit.
OPERATING TYPES
SUMMARY INTERFACE LEDS 4 DIGIT DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
LED INDICATION WHEN LIT  /2)) Local Off.7KHXQLWLVKDOWHGLQORFDOPRGH
Green LED:  /2Q Local On. The unit is in local control mode and is
The unit is authorised to start or is already running DXWKRULVHGWRVWDUW
Red LED:
A
 /LWFLUFXLW$RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP
 /6F  Local On - timer control. The unit is in local control
PRGH,WLVDXWKRULVHGWRVWDUWLIWKHSHULRGLVRFFXSLHG
- Flashing: circuit A or unit running with alarm present If the timer program for unit operation is unoccupied,
B Red LED: the unit remains shut down until the perod becomes
 /LWFLUFXLW%RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP RFFXSLHG
- Flashing: circuit B or unit running with alarm present CCN* CCN. 7KHXQLWLVFRQWUROOHGE\&&1FRPPDQGV
Red LED: rEM* Remote. The unit is controlled by remote control
 2SWLRQDODLUÁRZGHWHFWLRQ FRQWDFWV7KLVRSHUDWLQJW\SHVKDOOEHVHOHFWHGZKHQ
Green LED: XVLQJWKH5RRPPDWHFRPIRUWFRQWUROOHURSWLRQ
 7KHLQGRRUIDQLVUXQQLQJ tStA Remote by thermostat. The unit is comtrolled via
Yellow LEDs: H[WHUQDOFRQWDFWVE\DWKHUPRVWDW
 )URPWRSWRERWWRPVWDUWVWRSVWDWXVRIFRPSUHVVRU$RU% Legend
 )ODVKLQJ/('LQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHFLUFXLWLVLQWKHSURWHFWLRQRUGHIURVW  'LVSOD\HGLIWKHFRQÀJXUDWLRQUHTXLUHVLW
 PRGH$RU%
Green LED: Stopping the unit in local mode
 7KHXQLWRSHUDWHVLQKHDWLQJPRGH
Green LED:
The unit can be stopped in local mode at any time by pressing
 7KHXQLWRSHUDWHVLQFRROLQJPRGH the Start/Stop button.

TO STOP THE UNIT

SUMMARY INTERFACE PUSH BUTTONS BUTTON ACTION 2-DIGIT DISPLAY 4-DIGIT DISPLAY
BUTTON DISPLAY  3UHVVWKH6WDUW6WRS & /2))
 %OXHEXWWRQVXSSO\DLUWHPSHUDWXUHUHWXUQDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& button for less than
 *UD\EXWWRQRXWGRRUDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& 4 seconds (one short
 &RQWUROSRLQWVHWSRLQWUHVHWLQƒ&  SUHVVLVHQRXJK
 ,IWKHEXWWRQLV W /2))
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%GLVFKDUJHSUHVVXUHLQN3D released, the unit stops
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VDWXUDWHGFRQGHQVLQJWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& without the need for
 IXUWKHUDFWLRQ
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VXFWLRQSUHVVXUHLQN3D
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VDWXUDWHGVXFWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ&
 3UHVVFRPSUHVVRU$%RSHUDWLQJKRXUVLQKRUK Starting unit and selecting an operating type
The unit can be started in local mode, or unit operating type
can be changed at any time using the Start/Stop button. In the
example that follows, the unit is stopped (LOFF) and the user
Unit start/stop control
wants to start the unit in local mode.
Description
The unit start/stop can be controlled by one of the following CHANGING THE OPERATING TYPE
methods: BUTTON ACTION 2-DIGIT 4-DIGIT
DISPLAY DISPLAY
• Locally on the actual unit (Local operating type)
• By remote control with the aid of user contacts (remote  &RQWLQXDOO\SUHVVWKHRSHUDWLQJW\SH & /2))
operating type)  VHOHFWLRQEXWWRQIRUPRUHWKDQVHFRQGV
• By CCN control with the aid of the CCN (CCN operating
 +ROGGRZQWKH6WDUW6WRSEXWWRQ   /2Q
type)  7KHDYDLODEOHRSHUDWLQJW\SHVDUHGLVSOD\HG  /6F
 RQHE\RQHXQWLOWKHEXWWRQLVUHOHDVHG
The main interface includes a Start/Stop button which can be
used to stop or start the unit in the local operating type or to
select the remote or CCN operating type. rEM
 5HOHDVHWKH6WDUW6WRSEXWWRQLIWKH  /2Q
operating type you want is displayed (in
The available operating types are described in the following  WKLVH[DPSOH/2Q&ÁDVKHVLQWKH
table. 2-digit display to show that the controller is
 DZDLWLQJFRQÀUPDWLRQ
 3UHVVWKH(QWHUEXWWRQWRFRQÀUPWKH W /2Q
 RSHUDWLQJW\SHVHOHFWHGLQWKLVH[DPSOH/
 2QWLVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHGLJLWGLVSOD\WR
 LQGLFDWHWKHRSHUDWLQJW\SHVHOHFWHG,IWKH
Enter button is not pressed soon enough
the controller will cancel the change and
 FRQWLQXHWRXVHWKHSUHYLRXVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

23
Menus OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Selecting a menu - Economizer - enthalpic (option)

The MENU button authorises you to select a menu from the 10 - Economizer - thermostatic (option)
main menus that are available. Each time you press this button - Electric heater (option)
one of the 10 LEDs lights up in turn alongside each of the icons - Crankcase heater (option)
representing a main menu. The active menu is the one against - Hot water coil with proportional valve (option)
which the LED is lit. If a menu is empty then its LED is not lit. - Front discharge roof curb (accessory)
To scroll quickly through the menus, hold the MENU button - Vertical roof curb (accessory)
down. - Adjustable longitudinal roof curb, vertical discharge
(accessory)
Selecting a menu item - Adjustable transverse roof curb, vertical discharge
The up and down Arrow buttons let you scroll through the (accessory)
menu items. Menu item numbers are displayed in the two-digit - Air return fan (accessory)
display. The item number increases or decreases every time - Power exhaust (option)
you press the up or down Arrow button. The menu items that  'LUW\ÀOWHUDODUPRSWLRQ
DUHQRWLQXVHRULQFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKHFRQÀJXUDWLRQDUHQRW
displayed. The value or status associated with the active item
is displayed in the four-digit display. To scroll quickly through
the items, hold the up or down Arrow button down.
The following example shows how to access item 3 in the
Pressures menu.
 +LJKHIÀFLHQF\ÀOWHUVRSWLRQ
- Additional space temperature sensor (accessory)
- Smoke detector (option)
- Economizer hood (option/accessory)
- Programmable thermostat - TSTAT (accessory)
- Non-programmable thermostat - TSTAT (accessory)
- IAQ - indoor air quality sensor (accessory)
- Manual outdoor air damper (option/accessory)
SELECTING A MENU ITEM  $LUÁRZGHWHFWRURSWLRQ
OPERATION PRESS MENU LED* ITEM NUMBER
BUTTON 2-DIGIT
- Barometric exhaust (option)
DISPLAY - High static pressure transmission (option)
Press the MENU button until the - Low static pressure transmission (option)
35(6685(PHQXDSSHDUVRQWKH   
/&',IWKHRSWLRQDOLQWHUIDFHLV
- Room-mate comfort controller (accessory)
XVHGWKH/('PDUNHG35(6685(  kPa  - Enhanced user interface (option)
OLJKWVXS   - Stainless steel drain pan (option)
Press one of the Arrow buttons 1 - Free contact terminal (option)
XQWLOWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\VKRZV
LWHPQXPEHU   kPa
2

   
*Optional interface

Modifying the value of a parameter/access to a sub-menu

Press the Enter button for more than 2 seconds to enter the
PRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHRUWRVHOHFWDVXEPHQX7KLVOHWV\RX
correct the value of an item or select a sub-menu with the aid
of the up and down Arrow buttons (if you are authorised to
RYHUZULWHWKHLWHPFRQFHUQHG:KHQPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLV
activated, the LED of the main menu to which the item belongs
ÁDVKHVLQWKHPHQXEORFNLIWKHRSWLRQDOLQWHUIDFHLVXVHG

Once the required value is obtained, press the Enter button

again to validate the change or to access the sub-menu. The
LED for the menu to which the item belongs then stops
ÁDVKLQJLQGLFDWLQJWKDWPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHQRORQJHUDSSOLHV

,QPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHWKHYDOXHWREHPRGLÀHGLQFUHDVHV
or decreases in steps of 0.1 every time you press the Arrow
buttons. Holding one of these buttons down increases the rate
of increase or decrease.

24
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION: Before starting any servicing or maintenance
operation on the unit, make sure that the power supply has
been disconnected. A current discharge could cause personal
injury.
To adjust the belt tension, loosen the motor mounting plate
bolts and slide the motor mounting plate until the belt is as
shown in Fig. 14.
Fig. 13 - Fan speed adjustment

In order to obtain maximum performance from the unit special

attention should be paid to the following points:
- Electrical connections: The supply voltage should be
within the limits permitted by the compressor.

Ensure that no faulty contacts exist in the terminal blocks,

contactor boards, etc. Make sure that all the electrical
connections are properly tightened, and that all the
HOHFWULFDOFRPSRQHQWVFRQWDFWRUVUHOD\VHWFDUHÀUPO\
secured to the corresponding rails.
Pay special attention to the condition of the connecting
cables between the control elements and the electrical Legend
box, and to that of the unit power supply cable. They 1 Motor support 5 Belt
should not be twisted and there should be no slits or 2 Motor pulley 6 Tensioning screw
 6HWVFUHZ  )DQSXOOH\
notches in the insulation. Check the starting and running 4 Motor 8 Fan scroll
FRQVXPSWLRQVDUHZLWKLQWKHOLPLWVVSHFLÀHGLQWKH
corresponding technical information. Fig. 14 - To align fan and motor pulleys
- Drainage: Frequently check that the drain is not
obstructed, and that the condensate pan is clean and level.
 ,QOHWÀOWHUThis should be cleaned periodically. The
frequency depends on the purity of the entering air. The
ÀOWHUPD\EHFOHDQHGZLWKDKRXVHKROGYDFXXPFOHDQHURU
by immersing it in water.
- Refrigerant circuit: Ensure that there is no leakage of
refrigerant or oil from the compressor. Check that the high
and low side operating pressures are normal. Make sure
WKDWWKHFRLOVDUHQRWGLUW\,IQHFHVVDU\DQRSWLRQDOÀOWHU
may be placed at the outdoor air inlet. Check for unusual
compressor noise.
- Controls: Check the operation of all the relays, high and
low pressurestats, etc.

SERVICE

Indoor fan air adjustment  )L[HGÁDQJH

2 Setscrew
 0RYDEOHÁDQJH
The drive is factory set in accordance with the tables on 5.1. 4 Straight-edge must be parallel with belt
 0RWRUDQGIDQVKDIWVPXVWEHSDUDOOHO
6 Pulleys
:KHQLQGRRUSUHVVXUHDQGDLUÁRZUHTXLUHPHQWVGLIIHUIURP
nominal ratings, the motor pulley can be adjusted for different
available static pressure values (see fan performance tables).
Lubrication
To change the fan speed:
1. Move the motor along its track in order to remove the belt.
Both the motors and the fans have factory lubricated and sealed
2. Loosen the pulley setscrews and rotate as necessary.
bearings, and need no further lubrication.
3. Tighten the setscrews.
4. Replace the belt(s) in the channel of the pulley.
The compressor has its own oil supply and oil should not be
5. Tighten the belt(s), using the tension screw nut and
added unless a leak has occurred.
washer. See maintenance section and Fig. 13.

To align fan and motor pulleys:

1. Loosen fan pulley setscrews. Slide fan pulley along the
pulley shaft and align with the motor using a ruler, making
sure that it is parallel to the belt.
2. Tighten the fan pulley setscrews.

25
Condenser coil
:HUHFRPPHQGWKDWÀQQHGFRLOVDUHLQVSHFWHGUHJXODUO\WR
check the degree of fouling. This depends on the environment
where the unit is installed, and will be worse in urban and
industrial installations and near trees that shed their leaves.
For coil cleaning proceed as follows:
‡ 5HPRYHÀEUHVDQGGXVWFROOHFWHGRQWKHFRQGHQVHUIDFH
with a soft brush (or vacuum cleaner).
• Clean the coil with the appropriate cleaning agents.
With pressurised cleaning methods care should be taken not to
GDPDJHWKHFRLOÀQV7KHVSUD\LQJRIWKHFRLOPXVWEHGRQH EN 378-2 can be used.
 LQWKHGLUHFWLRQRIWKHÀQV
 LQWKHRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQRIWKHDLUÁRZGLUHFWLRQ
- with a large diffuser (25-30°)
- at a distance of 300 mm.
It is not necessary to rinse the coil, as the products used are
pH neutral. To ensure that the coil is perfectly clean, we
UHFRPPHQGULQVLQJZLWKDORZZDWHUÁRZUDWH7KHS+YDOXHRI
the water used should be between 7 and 8.
WARNING: Never use pressurized water without a large
diffusor. Concentrated and/or rotating water jets are strictly
forbidden.
Correct and frequent cleaning (approximately every three
months) will prevent 2/3 of the corrosion problems.
1HYHUXVHDÁXLGZLWKDWHPSHUDWXUHDERYHƒ&WRFOHDQWKH
air heat exchangers.
26
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
All maintenance operations must be carried out by technicians
who have been trained on Carrier products, observing all
Carrier quality and safety standards.
Maintenance instructions
During the unit operating life the service checks and tests must be
carried out in accordance with applicable national regulations.
If there are no similar criteria in local regulations, the
information on checks during operation in annex C of standard
External visual checks: annex A and B of standard EN 378-2
Corrosion checks: annex D of standard EN 378-2. These
controls must be carried out:
- After an intervention that is likely to affect the resistance
or a change in use or change of high-pressure refrigerant,
or after a shut down of more than two years. Components
that do not comply, must be changed. Test pressures above
the respective component design pressure must not be
applied (annex B and D).
 $IWHUUHSDLURUVLJQLÀFDQWPRGLÀFDWLRQVRUVLJQLÀFDQW
system or component extension (annex B)
- After re-installation at another site (annexes A, B and D)
- After repair following a refrigerant leak (annex D). The
frequency of refrigerant leak detection can vary from once
per year for systems with less than 1% leak rate per year
to once a day for systems with a leak rate of 35% per year
or more. The frequency is in proportion with the leak rate.
NOTE: High leak rates are not acceptable. The necessary
steps must be taken to eliminate any leak detected.
NOTE 2: Fixed refrigerant detectors are not leak detectors,
as they cannot locate the leak.
Maintenance schedule
Regular maintenance is indispensable to optimise the operating
life and reliability of the equipment. Maintenance operations
must be carried out in accordance with the schedules below:
Service Frequency
A Weekly
B Monthly
C Annually
IMPORTANT: Before each equipment maintenance
operation please ensure that:
- the unit is in the OFF position
- it is impossible for the unit to restart automatically
during maintenance.
Description of the maintenance operations
The equipment is supplied with polyolester oil (POE). Only use
oil approved by Carrier.
Service A
Full-load operating test
Verify the following values:
- compressor high-pressure side discharge pressure
- compressor low-pressure side suction pressure
- charge visible in the sight glass
Verify the alarm status
Service B
Carrier out the operations listed under Service A.
Refrigerant circuit
- Verify the air heat exchanger cleanliness status and clean
it at least once a year, or more often if the equipment
environment is especially demanding. To clean the
equipment, follow the Carrier recommendations. Among
other things, this ensures that the unit performances can be
guaranteed.
- Full-load operating test. In addition to the operations
described under Service A, check the following values:
- compressor discharge pressure
- compressor oil level
- actual liquid subcooling
- overheating at the expansion device
- on heat pumps verify correct defrost of the air heat
exchanger.
- Verify the charge status by checking the colour indicator
of the sightglass. If the colour has turned to yellow,
FKDQJHWKHFKDUJHDQGUHSODFHWKHÀOWHUGULHU$=XQLWV
only) after carrying out a leak test of the circuit.
Electrical checks
- Check the tightening of the electric connections, contactors,
disconnect switch and transformer.
- Check the status of the contactors, fuses and capacitators,
as required.
- Carry out a quick test (refer to the manual for the Rooftop
Pro-Dialog Plus control).
Mechanical checks
- Verify that nothing impedes the rotation of the fan
impeller of the air heat exchanger.
Service C
Carry out the operations listed under Service B.
Refrigerant circuit
- Check the leak-tightness of the circuit and ensure that
there is no piping damage.
- Carry out an oil contamination test. If acid, water or
metallic particles are present replace the oil in the circuit.
- Verify the tightening of the thermostatic mechanism of the
expansion device.
- Full-load operating test. In addition to the checks carried
out under Service B, validate the values of the heat
exchanger inlet and outlet tightening.
- Check the operation of the high-pressure and low-pressure
switches. Replace them if there is a fault.
 &KHFNWKHIRXOLQJRIWKHÀOWHUGULHUE\FKHFNLQJWKH
temperature difference in the copper piping - 50AZ units
only). Replace it if necessary.
Electrical checks
- Check the status of the electrical cables and their insulation.
- Carry out an operating test of the electric evaporator
heaters, compressor crankcase heater, piping and
expansion device, as required.
- Check the phase/earth insulation of the compressors and
fans.
- Check the compressor and fan winding status.
Mechanical checks
- Check the tightening of the indoor and outdoor fan,
FRPSUHVVRUDQGFRQWUROER[À[LQJEROWV
- Check that no water has penetrated into the control box.
- All metallic parts of the unit (chassis, casing panels,
control boxes, heat exchangers etc.) are protected against
corrosion by a coating of powder or liquid paint. To
prevent the risk of blistering corrosion that can appear
when moisture penetrates under the protective coatings,
it is necessary to carry out periodic checks of the coating
(paint) condition.
27
Servicing recommendations FINAL RECOMMENDATIONS

- Before replacing any of the elements in the cooling circuit,
ensure that the entire refrigerant charge is removed from
both the high and low pressure sides of the unit.
- The control elements of the cooling system are highly
sensitive. If they need to be replaced, care should be taken
not to overheat them with blowlamps whilst soldering.
A damp cloth should be wrapped around the component
WREHVROGHUHGDQGWKHÁDPHGLUHFWHGDZD\IURPWKH
component body.
- Silver alloy soldering rods should always be used.
- If the total unit gas charge has to be replaced, the quantity
should be as given on the nameplate and the unit should
be properly evacuated beforehand.
- During unit operation all panels should be in place,
including the electrical box access panel.
- If it is necessary to cut the lines of the refrigerant circuit,
tube cutters should always be used and never tools which
produce burrs. All refrigerant circuit tubing should be of
copper, specially made for refrigeration purposes.
The unit you have purchased has undergone strict quality
control procedures before leaving the factory.
All components, including the control systems and electrical
HTXLSPHQWHWFDUHFHUWLÀHGE\RXU4XDOLW\&RQWURO
Department, and tested under the harshest possible operating
conditions in our laboratories. However, after leaving the
factory, it is possible that one or more of these elements
may be damaged due to causes beyond our control. In such
an event, the user should not work on any of the internal
components, or subject the unit to operating conditions
ZKLFKDUHQRWVSHFLÀHGLQWKLVPDQXDO since serious damage
may result and the guarantee would be invalidated. Repair and
maintenance work should always be left to the installer.
All recommendations concerning unit installation are intended to
be as a guideline. The installer should carry out the installation
according to the design conditions and should comply with all
applicable regulations for air conditioning and refrigeration
installations.

NOTE: The manufacturer does not accept responsibility for

any malfunctions resulting from misuse of the equipment.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

A list of possible faults, as well as the probable cause and suggested solutions is shown in Table 9. In the event of a unit
malfunction it is recommended to disconnect the power supply and ascertain the cause.

Table 9 - Troubleshooting chart

Symptoms Cause Remedy

Unit does not start No power supply Connect power supply
Main switch open Close main unit disconnect switch
 /RZOLQHYROWDJH &KHFNYROWDJHDQGUHPHG\WKHGHÀFLHQF\
A protection has tripped Reset
Contactor stuck open Check and if necessary replace contactor
Seized compressor Check and if necessary replace compressor
Unit starts and stops frequently Defective compressor contactor Check and if necessary replace contactor
Defective compressor Check and if necessary replace compressor
Refrigerant losses Check and add the necessary quantity
Unit continuously cuts out at Cooling unit
low pressure Defective low pressure transducer Check and if necessary replace low pressure transducer
Refrigerant losses Check and add the necessary quantity
Indoor fan does not operate Check fan motor
Unit continuously cuts out at Cooling unit
high pressure Defective high pressurestat Check and if necessary replace pressurestat
 %ORFNHGÀOWHUGULHU &KHFNDQGLIQHFHVVDU\UHSODFHÀOWHU
Outdoor fan does not operate Check fan motor

Heat pump unit

Defective high pressurestat Replace pressurestat
Outdoor fan does not operate Check fan motor
Abnormal system noise Piping vibration Support piping
Noisy compressor Check and change if necessary
 %DGO\ÀWWLQJSDQHOV ,QVWDOOFRUUHFWO\
Compressor loses oil Leak in system Repair leak
Water loss Defective drainage connections Check and tighten if necessary

2UGHU1R6XSHUVHGHVRUGHU1R 0DQXIDFWXUHGE\$ODUNR&DUULHU*HE]H7XUNH\
0DQXIDFWXUHUUHVHUYHVWKHULJKWWRFKDQJHDQ\SURGXFWVSHFLÀFDWLRQVZLWKRXWQRWLFH 3ULQWHGLQWKH1HWKHUODQGV

®
Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans
Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting to assemble,
install, operate or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by observing all safety
information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury and/or property damage!
Model CW
Direct Drive
Model CW is a direct drive
centrifugal sidewall exhaust fan.
These fans are specifically designed
for wall mounted application.
Performance capabilities range up to
6,400  cfm (10,874  m3/hr) and up to
3  in.  wg (747  Pa) of static pressure.
The maximum continuous operating
temperature for fan sizes 098-200 is 400°F (204°C)
and for fan sizes 060-095 is 160°F (71°C). CW fans
are available in fourteen sizes with nominal wheel
diameter ranging from 9 to 20 inches (229  mm to
508  mm) (060 - 200 unit sizes). Each fan shall bear
a permanently affixed manufacturer’s engraved
metal nameplate containing the model number and
individual serial number.
General Safety Information
Only qualified personnel should install this fan.
Personnel should have a clear understanding of these
instructions and should be aware of general safety
precautions. Improper installation can result in electric
shock, possible injury due to coming in contact with
moving parts, as well as other potential hazards. Other
considerations may be required if high winds or seismic
activity are present. If more information is needed,
contact a licensed professional engineer before moving
forward.
DANGER
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source
can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
CAUTION
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
CAUTION
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres.
PN 457691
Models CW/CWB
Model CWB
Belt Drive
Model CWB is a belt drive centrifugal
sidewall exhaust fan. These fans are
specifically designed for wall mounted
application. Performance capabilities
range up to 12,500 cfm (21,200 m3/hr)
and up to 2.75 in. wg (685 Pa) of static
pressure. The maximum continuous
operating temperature is 400°F (204.4°C).
CWB fans are available in nineteen sizes with nominal
wheel diameter ranging from 9 to 30 inches (229 to
762 mm) (098 - 300 unit sizes). Each fan shall bear
a permanently affixed manufacturer’s engraved
metal nameplate containing the model number and
individual serial number.
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and the
National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA), where
applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric Code (CEC)
in Canada.
2. The rotation of the wheel is critical. It must be free
to rotate without striking or rubbing any stationary
objects.
3. Motor must be securely and adequately grounded.
4. Do not spin fan wheel faster than max cataloged fan
RPM. Adjustments to fan speed significantly effects
motor load. If the fan RPM is changed, the motor
current should be checked to make sure it is not
exceeding the motor nameplate amps.
5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come in
contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces, or chemicals.
Replace cord immediately if damaged.
6. Verify that the power source is compatible with the
equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan is
running.
Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans 1
CW - Direct Drive Dimensions
Damper Mounting B**
Wall Damper
Model A B** C Frame Bolt
Opening Size
Size Circle
CW-060, 065, 183⁄8 131⁄2 143⁄4 81⁄2 8 113⁄4
10 (254)
070, 075 (467) (343) (375) (216) (203) (298)

Mounting Hole Bolt Circle

CW-080, 085, 21 13 ⁄8
3
17 ⁄8
7
10 ⁄2
1
10 12 15

Damper Frame Size

090 (533) (340) (454) (267) (254) (305) (381)

Wall Opening
Damper Size
21 151⁄4 177⁄8 101⁄2 10 12 15 C A
CW-095
(533) (387) (454) (267) (254) (305) (381)
CW-098, 101, 247⁄8 281⁄4 193⁄4 121⁄2 12 14 16 7⁄8
121, 131 (632) (718) (502) (318) (305) (356) (429)
287⁄8 293⁄4 221⁄8 151⁄2 15 17 193⁄8
CW-141, 161
(733) (756) (562) (394) (381) (432) (492)
353⁄8 285⁄8 273⁄4 171⁄2 17 19 25
CW-180, 200
(905) (727) (705) (445) (432) (483) (635) 5" *
All dimensions in inches (millimeters). *NOTE: 2 inches minimum, 8 inches when motorized
option is required. *May vary depending on motor size.

CWB - Belt Drive Dimensions B

Damper Mounting
Wall Damper
Model A B** C Frame Bolt
Opening Size
Size Circle
CWB-098, 101, 247⁄8 281⁄4 193⁄4 121⁄2 12 14 167⁄8

Mounting Hole Bolt Circle

121, 131 (632) (718) (502) (318) (305) (356) (429)

Damper Frame Size

Wall Opening
Damper Size
287⁄8 293⁄4 221⁄8 151⁄2 15 17 193⁄8
CWB-141, 161 C A
(733) (756) (562) (394) (381) (432) (492)
353⁄8 285⁄8 273⁄4 171⁄2 17 19 25
CWB-180, 200
(899) (727) (705) (445) (432) (483) (635)
42 ⁄32 33 ⁄8
25 7
31 ⁄4
1
20 ⁄2
1
20 22 28 3⁄8
CWB-220, 240
(1087) (860) (794) (521) (508) (559) (721)
50 36 383⁄8 251⁄2 25 27 3527⁄32
CWB-300
(1270) (914) (975) (648) (635) (686) (910)
5" *
All dimensions in inches (millimeters). *NOTE: 2 inches minimum, 7 inches when motorized
option is required. **May vary depending on motor size.

Receiving the electrical supply should be routed through the

Upon receiving the product, check to make sure all
items are accounted for by referencing the bill of lading
to ensure all items were received. Inspect each crate for
shipping damage before accepting delivery. Notify the
carrier if any damage is noticed. The carrier will make
notification on the delivery receipt acknowledging any
damage to the product. All damage should be noted on
all the copies of the bill of lading which is countersigned
by the delivering carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report
should be filled out by the carrier upon arrival and
reported to the Traffic Department. If damaged upon
arrival, file a claim with carrier. Any physical damage
to the unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
Unpacking
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative to
arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it is not
possible that all items for the unit be shipped together
due to availability of transportation and truck space.
Confirmation of shipment(s) must be limited to only
items on the bill of lading.
Handling
The motor amperage and voltage ratings must be
checked for compatibility to supply voltage prior to
final electrical connection. For CW/CWB installations,
2 Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans
conduit chase located between the mounting plate and
the bottom of the motor compartment. Wiring must
conform to local and national codes.
CAUTION
Do not lift by the fan hood. Avoid lifting fans in a
way that will bend or distort fan parts. Never pass
slings or timbers through the venturi of fan. Fans
with special coatings or paints must be protected
in handling to prevent damage.
Storage
Fans are protected against damage during shipment. If
the unit cannot be installed and operated immediately,
precautions need to be taken to prevent deterioration of
the unit during storage. The user assumes responsibility
of the fan and accessories while in storage. Greenheck
Fan Corporation will not be responsible for damage
during storage. These suggestions are provided solely
as a convenience to the user.
Indoor
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low humidity
atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the entry of
blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures should be
evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F (-1° to 43°C)
®
(wide temperature swings may cause condensation
and “sweating” of metal parts). All accessories must be
stored indoors in a clean, dry atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or snow
and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage. To
avoid “sweating” of metal parts, allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to get rid of any moisture
buildup. Leave coverings loose to permit air circulation
and to allow for periodic inspection.
The unit should be stored at least 3½ in. (89 mm) off the
floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture proof
paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles between parts
and along all walls should be provided to permit air
circulation and space for inspection.
Outdoor
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be stored
outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or aisles for
portable cranes and hauling equipment are needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to prevent
water from leaking into the fan. The fan should be
elevated on an adequate number of wooden blocks so
that it is above water and snow levels and has enough
blocking to prevent it from settling into soft ground.
Locate parts far enough apart to permit air circulation,
sunlight and space for periodic inspection. To minimize
water accumulation, place all fan parts on blocking
supports so that rain water will run off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles.
Fan wheels should be blocked to prevent spinning
caused by strong winds.
Inspection and Maintenance During
Storage
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep a
record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given to
touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings may
require special techniques for touch-up or repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should be
restored to good condition promptly if signs of rust
occur. Immediately remove the original rust preventive
coating with petroleum solvent and clean with lint-free
cloths. Polish any remaining rust from surface with
crocus cloth or fine emery paper and oil. Do not destroy
the continuity of the surfaces. Thoroughly wipe clean
with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.) or the equivalent. For
hard to reach internal surfaces or for occasional use,
consider using Tectyl® 511M Rust Preventive, WD-40®
or the equivalent.
Removing From Storage
As fans are removed from storage to be installed in their
final location, they should be protected and maintained
®
in a similar fashion until the fan equipment goes into
operation.
Installation
These fans exhaust directly away from the building,
therefore their location and placement should be
analyzed. Proximity to nearby buildings and people
must be considered.
Access to the motor compartment is accomplished by
removing the screws from the cover. The cover can
then be removed and placed on a flat surface in an area
protected from strong winds.
The motor’s amperage and voltage rating must be
checked for compatibility to the supply voltage prior
to final electrical connection. For NFPA Restaurant
Applications, the electrical supply must enter the
motor compartment through the breather tube. For
other non-flammable applications the electrical supply
can be routed through the conduit chase between
the mounting plate and the bottom of the motor
compartment. Consult local code authorities for your
specific requrements. UL/cUL 762 Installations are for
Restaurant Applications.
All CWB fans and CW fans with A, B and C motor RPMs
are the only fans approved for this installation. All must
include the suffix “G”.
All fans must be installed per NFPA 96 and meet all
local code requirements. In addition, the maximum
operating temperature at the fan must not exceed
375°F (191°C).
Typical Wall Mounting Installation
1. Remove mounting plate from unit by removing the
fasteners shown above marked by (1). Remove
motor compartment cover by removing fasteners
marked by (2).
1 2
3
1
2
2. Locate the mounting plate (3) at the desired position
and check to avoid unit clearance problems. Cut the
wall opening (4) as shown based upon dimensions
obtained from the Dimensional Data Section. Locate
top of mounting plate (decal) and attach to the wall
construction. The fasteners must pass through the
holes provided in the mounting angle clips (5) on the
mounting plate (3). For uneven surfaces, shims may
be required. Sealant or caulking should be applied in
the groove (6) formed by the mounting plate and the
wall to prevent moisture leakage into the building.
Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans 3
 Pre-Starting Checks
6 DECAL 1. Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness.
Caulking The wheel should rotate freely and be aligned as
TOP
DETAIL shown in figure 7.
3 2. Wheel position is preset and the unit is test run at
the factory. Movement may occur during shipment
and realignment may be necessary.
5
Wheel Overlap and Gap Dimensions
DETAIL
Model G - Overlap in (mm) H - Gap in (mm)
4
060-095 – 3/32 (2)
6
098-161 1/4 (6) –
3. Once the mounting plate has been attached to the 180-300 1/2 (13) –
wall, the unit can be installed. The unit should be
aligned with the breather tube (7) pointing down.
The electrical chase should be guided through the
hole in the motor compartment. The horizontal
support channels (8) should slide over the mounting G H
angle clips (10) on the mounting plate until the holes
in the windband and clips are aligned. Replace
fasteners (9) and tighten. Wiring now can be done.
Consult local code authorities for your specific Figure 7
requirements.
3. Only CW unit - Centering height alignment can
10 9 be accomplished by loosening the set screws in
the wheel and moving the wheel to the desired
position.
4. Only CWB unit - Centering can be accomplished by
loosening the bolts holding the drive frame to the
ELECTRICAL
WIRING
shock mounts and repositioning the drive frame.
5. Only CWB unit - Wheel and inlet cone overlap
can be adjusted by loosening the setscrews in
the wheel and moving the wheel to the desired
8 7 position.
9
6. Only CWB unit - Fan RPM should be checked and
4. During shipping, wheel position may shift. verified with a tachometer.
Alignment should be as shown above (centered in 7. Check wheel rotation (viewing from the shaft
the inlet) and can be accomplished by loosening the side) by momentarily energizing the unit. Rotation
fasteners (11) located in the motor compartment. should be clockwise and correspond to the rotation
For belt drive units, additional vertical alignment can decal on the unit, see figure 8. If wheel rotation is
be accomplished by loosening the four fasteners on incorrect reverse two of the wiring leads or check
the drive frame support angles, and the 2 fasteners motor wiring for single phase.
that hold the L-brackets to the support angles on
top (13). Also, horizontal alignment can be made by Wheel Rotation
loosening the bearings from the bearing plate.
Removal of the entire power pack (motor, drives
and wheel) for maintenance or cleaning can be
accomplished by removing the breather tube (12) and
fasteners (11).
All CW and CWB models
11 CW/CWB Models 098 - 300
13 Counterclock
have clockwise rotation
Airflow
when viewed from top
of fan

Figure 8 Clockwise
Airflow
CW Models 060-095

12 13

4 Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans ®

 WARNING
Correct direction of wheel rotation is critical.
Reversed rotation will result in poor air
performance, motor overloading and possible
burnout.
Model CWB
Pre-Starting Belt Tension Checks
8. Always loosen tension enough to install belts
without stretching, see figure 9.
Belts
Do not force belt(s). Forcing the
belt(s) will break the cords and
Figure 9 cause belt failure
.
9. For units with two groove pulleys, adjust so the
tension is equal in both belts.
10. If adjustments are made, it is very important to
check the pulleys for proper alignment. Misaligned
pulleys lead to excessive belt wear vibration, noise
and power loss, see figure 10.
Figure 10
11. For CWB units: Belt tension can be adjusted by
loosening four fasteners on the drive frame, see
figure 11. The motor plate slides on the slotted
adjusting arms and drive frame angles in the same
manner.
Fasteners
(4) *Fasteners
*Identical fasteners on
opposing side must also
be loosened.
Figure 11
12a. Sizes 071-161: Belts should be tensioned just
enough to prevent slippage at full load. Belts
should have a slight bow on the slack side while
running at full load (see figure 12a).
12b. Sizes 180-540: Belt tension should be adjusted to
allow 1/64 in. (0.397 mm) of deflection per inch of
belt span. For example, a 15 in. (381 mm) belt span
®
WARNING
The fan has been checked for mechanical noises at
the factory prior to shipment. If mechanical noise
should develop, suggested corrective actions are
offered in the Troubleshooting section.
IMPORTANT
Over tightening will cause excessive bearing wear
and noise. Too little tension will cause slippage at
startup and uneven wear.
should have 15/64 in. (0.234 mm) (or about 1/4 in.
(6 mm)) of deflection with moderate thumb pressure
at mid-point between pulleys (see figure 12b).
Deflection
Slack
Side
Figure 12a Figure 12b
13. The adjustable motor pulley is factory set for the
RPM specified. Speed can be increased by closing
or decreased by opening the adjustable motor
pulley. Two groove variable pitch pulleys must be
adjusted an equal number of turns open or closed.
14. Any increase in speed represents a substantial
increase in the horsepower required by the unit.
15. Motor amperage should always be checked to avoid
serious damage to the motor when speed is varied.
Operation: CW/CWB
1. Before starting up or operating fan, check all
fasteners for tightness. In particular, check the
setscrews in wheel hub (and pulleys, if applicable).
2. While in the OFF position or before connecting the
fan to power, turn the fan wheel by hand to be sure
it is not striking the venturi or any obstacle.
3. Start the fan and shut it off immediately to check
rotation of the wheel with directional arrow in the
motor compartment, see figure 8.
4. When the fan is started, observe the operation and
check for any unusual noises.
5. With the system in full operation and all ductwork
attached, measure current input to the motor and
compare with the nameplate rating to determine if
the motor is operating under safe load conditions.
6. Keep inlets and approaches to fan clean and free
from obstruction.
Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans 5
Inspection: CW/CWB
Inspection of the fan should be conducted at the
first 30 minute and 24 hour intervals of satisfactory
operation.
30 Minute Interval
Inspect bolts, setscrews and motor mounting bolts.
Adjust and tighten as necessary.
24 Hour Interval
Check all internal components. On CWB unit only,
inspect belt alignment and tension. Adjust and tighten
as necessary.
IMPORTANT
Adjust (tighten) belt tension after the first 24-48 hours
of operation.
Maintenance: CW/CWB
A proper maintenance program will help these units
deliver years of dependable service. Installation and
maintenance are to be performed only by qualified
personnel who are familiar with local codes and
regulations and who are experienced with this type of
equipment.
Motor maintenance is generally limited to cleaning
and lubrication (where applicable). Cleaning should be
limited to exterior surfaces only. Removing dust buildup
on motor housing ensures proper motor cooling.
Greasing of motors is only intended when fittings are
provided. Many fractional horsepower motors are
permanently lubricated and should not be lubricated
after installation. Motors supplied with grease fittings
should be greased in accordance with manufacturers’
recommendations. Where motor temperatures do not
exceed 104ºF (40ºC), the grease should be replaced
after 2,000 hours of running time as a general rule.
Wheels require very little attention when moving
clean air. Occasionally, oil and dust may accumulate
causing imbalance. When this occurs the wheel and
housing should be cleaned to ensure smooth and safe
operation.
All fasteners should be checked for tightness each time
maintenance checks are performed prior to restarting
unit.
A proper maintenance program will help these units
deliver years of dependable service.
Belt/Bearing Maintenance CWB Unit
1. Belts tend to stretch after a period of time. They
should be checked periodically for wear and
tightness. When replacing belts, use the same type
as supplied with the unit.
2. Matched belts should always be used on units with
multi-groove pulleys.
3. For belt replacement, loosen the tensioning device
enough to allow removal of the belt by hand. Do not
force the belts on or off. This may cause cords to
break, leading to premature failure.
6 Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans
WARNING
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
servicing. Failure to disconnect power source can
result in fire, shock or serious injury.
CAUTION
Uneven cleaning of the wheel will produce an out of
balance condition that will cause vibration in the fan.
WARNING
This unit should be made non-functional when
cleaning the wheel or housing (fuses removed,
disconnect locked off).
4. Once installed, adjust belts as shown in
“Pre‑Starting Checks.”
5. Shaft bearings can be classified in two
groups:relubricating and non-relubricating. All
non‑relubricating bearings on standard model
CWB fans are factory lubricated and require no
further lubrication under normal use (between
-20º to 180ºF (-29º to 82ºC) in a relatively clean
environment).
6. Units installed in hot, humid or dirty locations
should be equipped with special bearings. These
bearings will require frequent lubrication. On CWB
belt driven fans, the standard cast pillow block
bearings are factory lubricated and are provided
with external grease fittings. Annual lubrication
is recommended, or more frequently if needed,
see Table 2. Do not over-grease. Use only one or
two shots of lubricant with a hand gun. Maximum
hand gun rating is 40 psi. Rotate bearings during
lubrication where good safety practice permits.
Caution should be employed to prevent over
packing or contamination.
7. Grease fittings should be wiped clean. The unit
should be in operation while lubricating. Extreme
care should be used around moving parts.
8. Grease should be pumped in very slowly until a
slight bead forms around the seal. A high grade
lithium base grease should be used.
9. When installing restaurant exhaust applications
follow NFPA 70 for cleaning fans.
10. Grease containers must be emptied at regular
intervals to prevent overflow.
11. To ensure tightness, check pulley setscrews. Proper
keys must be in keyways.
12. Fan RPM should not be readjusted. Only use
pulleys of identical size and type when replacing
pulleys.
13. During the first few months of operation check
bearing set screws periodically to ensure tightness.
14. If unit is to be left idle for an extended period,
remove belts and store in a cool, dry place to avoid
premature belt failure.
®
Recommended Relubrication Table 3: Grease Manufacturers
Frequency in Months Manufacturer Grease (NLGI #2)
NOTE: If unusual environment conditions exist U.S. Electric Motors Grease No. 83343
(extreme temperature, moisture or contaminants) more Chevron U.S.A. Inc Chevron SRI Grease #2
frequent lubrication is required. Mobilith
Mobil Oil Corporation
A good quality lithium base grease, conforming to Mobil 532
NLGI Grade 2 consistency, such as those listed here Premium BRB #2
may be used. Texaco, Inc.
Texaco Multifak #2
Amoco Oil Co. Rykon Premium #2
Table 2: Suggested Fan Bearing Greasing Intervals
Exxon Unirex N2
Interval
Type of Service Shell B Shell Alvania #2
(months)
Heavy duty in dirty, dusty locations; high ambient
1 to 3 temperatures; moisture laden atmosphere;
vibration.
12 to 24 hours per day, heavy duty, or if moisture
3 to 6
is present
8 to 16 hours per day in clean, relatively dry
6 to 12
atmosphere
Infrequent operation or light duty in clean
12 to 18
atmosphere

Parts List
NOTE
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will as-
sist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
CAUTION
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

CW Direct Drive Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fan

Windband
Birdscreen Motor Compartment
Mounting Plate

Wheel
Breather Tube Cover

®
Model CW/CWB • Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fans 7
 CWB Belt Drive Centrifugal Sidewall Exhaust Fan

Windband
Birdscreen Motor Compartment
Mounting Plate

Wheel Cover
Breather Tube

Troubleshooting
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Bad Bearings Replace.

Clean and remove all dirt buildup off wheel. Check wheel
Wheel unbalance
balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Belts too tight or too loose Adjust tension, see figure 12a-b.
Excessive Noise
or Vibration Wheel improperly aligned and
Center wheel on inlet, see figure 7.
rubbing
Loose drive or motor pulleys Align and tighten. See “Pre-Starting Checks”, see page 4-6.
Foreign objects in wheel or
Remove objects, check for damage or unbalance.
housing
Check system: Proper operation of backdraft or control
System resistance too high
dampers, obstruction in ductwork, clean dirty filters.
Unit running backwards Correct as shown in figure 8.
Reduced airflow
Excessive dirt buildup on wheels Clean wheel.

Improper wheel alignment Center wheel on inlets, see Pre-Starting checks and figure 7.

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of
one year from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will
be replaced at our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the
motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during
this period, they should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be
responsible for any removal or installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Series C provides additional information describing the

equipment, fan performance, available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for Users and Installers of Industrial
® and Commercial Fans, provides additional safety information. This publication
can be obtained from AMCA International, Inc. at: www.amca.org.

Phone: (715) 359-6171 • Fax: (715) 355-2399 • E-mail: gfcinfo@greenheck.com • Website: www.greenheck.com

8 457691 • Models CW/CWB, Rev. 5, September 2008 Copyright 2008 © Greenheck Fan Corp
 Serving area: Control bldg SWGR room
Qty: 4
Selected Model: SBCS-3H54- 50
Capacity : 24500 m3/hr PN 471755
Supply Fan


Sidewall Propeller Fans
#FMU
%SJWF
%JSFDU
%SJWF
BOE
3FWFSTJCMF
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
*OTUBMMBUJPO
0QFSBUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
.BOVBM
Please read and save these instructions for future reference. Read carefully before attempting
to assemble, install, operate, or maintain the product described. Protect yourself and others by
observing all safety information. Failure to comply with instructions could result in personal injury
and/or property damage!

Sidewall Propeller Fans

Greenheck’s sidewall propeller fan line is the ideal choice for factory and
warehouse applications where high volumes of air and low pressures are
required. From general ventilation to industrial duty, the range of construction
and performance capabilities offered represent the most comprehensive sidewall
propeller fan line in the industry.
Performance spans the range between 300 to 87,000 cfm (510 to 147,814 m3/hr)
with static pressures to 1.25 in. wg (249 Pa). Fan sizes range from 8 to 54 inches
(203 to 1372 mm) for direct drive and 20 to 72 inches (508 to 1829 mm) for belt
drive. Regardless of fan size, performance or duty level, all Greenheck sidewall
propeller fans are built to perform with the same high standards of reliability and
durability. All models are available in exhaust or supply arrangements.
Models SE1, SS1, SE2, SS2, SCE3, SCS3, SCR3, SBE-1, SBS-1, SBE-2, SBS-2, SBE-3, SBS-3, SBCE, SBCS, and SBCR.

'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
Filtered supply wall housings are available in seven sizes for fans ranging
from size 24 to 54 inches (610 to 1372 mm). They are designed with
the draw-thru concept to achieve the highest filter and fan efficiencies.
Permanent 2 inch (51 mm) washable filters are accessed through a bolted
panel and can be easily removed for cleaning.
(FOFSBM
4BGFUZ
*OGPSNBUJPO
Only qualified personnel should install this fan. the National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA),
Personnel should have a clear understanding of where applicable. Follow the Canadian Electric
these instructions and should be aware of general Code (CEC) in Canada.
safety precautions. Improper installation can result 2. The rotation of the propeller is critical. It must
in electric shock, possible injury due to coming in be free to rotate without striking or rubbing any
contact with moving parts, as well as other potential stationary objects.
hazards. Other considerations may be required 3. Motor must be securely and adequately
if high winds or seismic activity are present. If grounded.
more information is needed, contact a licensed
4. Do not spin fan propeller faster than max
professional engineer before moving forward.
cataloged fan RPM. Adjustments to fan speed
%"/(&3 significantly effects motor load. If the fan RPM is
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before changed, the motor current should be checked
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power source to make sure it is not exceeding the motor
can result in fire, shock or serious injury. nameplate amps.
$"65*0/ 5. Do not allow the power cable to kink or come
in contact with oil, grease, hot surfaces,
When servicing the fan, motor may be hot enough to or chemicals. Replace cord immediately if
cause pain or injury. Allow motor to cool before servicing.
damaged.
$"65*0/ 6. Verify that the power source is compatible with
Precaution should be taken in explosive atmospheres. the equipment.
7. Never open access doors to a duct while the fan
1. Follow all local electrical and safety codes, as
is running.
well as the National Electrical Code (NEC) and
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 1
3FDFJWJOH
Upon receiving the product, check to make sure
all items are accounted for by referencing the bill
of lading to ensure all items were received. Inspect
each crate for shipping damage before accepting
delivery. Notify the carrier if any damage is noticed.
The carrier will make notification on the delivery
receipt acknowledging any damage to the product.
All damage should be noted on all the copies of the
bill of lading which is countersigned by the delivering
carrier. A Carrier Inspection Report should be filled
out by the carrier upon arrival and reported to the
Traffic Department. If damaged upon arrival, file
a claim with carrier. Any physical damage to the
unit after acceptance is not the responsibility of
Greenheck Fan Corporation.
6OQBDLJOH
Verify that all required parts and the correct quantity
of each item have been received. If any items are
missing, report shortages to your local representative
to arrange for obtaining missing parts. Sometimes it
is not possible that all items for the unit be shipped
together due to availability of transportation and
truck space. Confirmation of shipment(s) must be
limited to only items on the bill of lading.
Note: The filtered supply unit ships with all ordered
components completely factory assembled. The
optional weatherhood ships knocked down for field
assembly and installation.
4UPSBHF
Fans are protected against damage during shipment.
If the unit cannot be installed and operated
immediately, precautions need to be taken to prevent
deterioration of the unit during storage. The user
assumes responsibility of the fan and accessories
while in storage. The manufacturer will not be
responsible for damage during storage. These
suggestions are provided solely as a convenience to
the user.
INDOOR
The ideal environment for the storage of fans and
accessories is indoors, above grade, in a low
humidity atmosphere which is sealed to prevent the
entry of blowing dust, rain or snow. Temperatures
should be evenly maintained between 30° to 110°F
(-1° to 43°C), wide temperature swings may cause
condensation and “sweating” of metal parts. All
accessories must be stored indoors in a clean, dry
atmosphere.
Remove any accumulations of dirt, water, ice, or
snow and wipe dry before moving to indoor storage.
To avoid “sweating” of metal parts allow cold parts to
reach room temperature. To dry parts and packages
use a portable electric heater to remove any moisture
build up. Leave coverings loose to permit air
circulation and to allow for periodic inspection.
2 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
The unit should be stored at least 3½ inches (89 mm)
off the floor on wooden blocks covered with moisture
proof paper or polyethylene sheathing. Aisles
between parts and along all walls should be provided
to permit air circulation and space for inspection.
OUTDOOR
Fans designed for outdoor applications may be
stored outdoors, if absolutely necessary. Roads or
aisles for portable cranes and hauling equipment are
needed.
The fan should be placed on a level surface to
prevent water from leaking into the fan. The fan
should be elevated on an adequate number of
wooden blocks so it is above water and snow levels
and has enough blocking to prevent it from settling
into soft ground. Locate parts far enough apart to
permit air circulation, sunlight and space for periodic
inspection. To minimize water accumulation, place all
fan parts on blocking supports so rain water will run
off.
Do not cover parts with plastic film or tarps as these
cause condensation of moisture from the air passing
through heating and cooling cycles. Fan wheels
should be blocked to prevent spinning caused by
strong winds.
*OTQFDUJPO
BOE
.BJOUFOBODF
%VSJOH

4UPSBHF
While in storage, inspect fans once per month. Keep
a record of inspection and maintenance performed.
If moisture or dirt accumulations are found on parts,
the source should be located and eliminated. At each
inspection, rotate the wheel by hand ten to fifteen
revolutions to distribute lubricant on motor. If paint
deterioration begins, consideration should be given
to touch-up or repainting. Fans with special coatings
may require special techniques for touch-up or
repair.
Machined parts coated with rust preventive should
be restored to good condition promptly if signs of
rust occur. Immediately remove the original rust
preventive coating with petroleum solvent and clean
with lint-free cloths. Polish any remaining rust from
surface with crocus cloth or fine emery paper and
oil. Do not destroy the continuity of the surfaces.
Thoroughly wipe clean with Tectyl® 506 (Ashland Inc.)
or the equivalent. For hard to reach internal surfaces
or for occasional use, consider using Tectyl® 511M
Rust Preventive, WD-40® or the equivalent.
3FNPWJOH
'SPN
4UPSBHF
As fans are removed from storage to be installed
in their final location, they should be protected
and maintained in a similar fashion until the fan
equipment goes into operation.
®
1SF*OTUBMMBUJPO
$IFDLT
t
Check chart below for correct wall opening
dimensions.
t
Check motor voltage and amperage rating for
compatibility with electrical supply. Supply wiring
must be properly fused and conform to local and
national codes.
t
Motor load amperage must be checked and
compared to nameplate rating to avoid serious
damage to motor when speed is increased.
8BMM
0QFOJOH
3FRVJSFNFOUT
Wall opening size and propeller-to-damper distance
are two important dimensions for fan installation.
Fans mounted to the wall require a different wall
opening (W.O.) size than those mounted in collars or
wall housings. Propeller-to-damper distance (M) is
important to reduce turbulence and damper flutter
which may lead to premature damper failure.
Figure 1 and 2 show the wall opening (W.O.) required
for installations with either a wall housing or collar.
Figure 3 shows the recommended wall opening
(W.O.) and the minimum distance (M) suggested
between the fan and damper for direct to wall
installations.
Figure 4 shows the dimensions and wall opening
(W.O.) required for installations with a filtered supply
wall housing.

W.O.
W.O.

Figure 1 - Wall Housing Installation Figure 2 - Wall Collar Installation

Wall
Wall Filter
Housing Section INTERIOR EXTERIOR
Optional 90º
Weatherhood

Filters
Filters
Airflow
A
W.O.

M
C 24 in. 15 in. Optional
Wall

Damper
B

Figure 3 - Direct to Wall Installation Figure 4 - Filtered Supply Wall Housing Installation

3FDPNNFOEFE
8BMM
0QFOJOH
80


%BNQFS 'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
0OMZ
Fan 4RVBSF .
Size
Size 'JHVSFT

.JOJNVN
4RVBSF 'JHVSF
 'JHVSF
 " B C 'JMUFS
2VBOUJUZ

4J[F
and 2
8 10 (254) 14¼ (362) 10½ (267) - 6 (152) - - - -
10 12 (305) 16¼ (413) 12½ (318) - 6 (152) - - - -
12 14 (356) 19¼ (489) 14½ (368) - 7 (178) - - - -
14 16 (406) 21¼ (540) 16½ (419) - 8 (203) - - - -
16 18 (457) 23¼ (591) 18½ (470) - 9 (229) - - - -
18 20 (508) 25¼ (641) 20½ (521) - 10 (254) - - - -
20 22 (559) 27¼ (692) 22½ (572) - 12 (305) - - - -
24 26 (660) 33¾ (857) 26½ (673) 333⁄4 (857) 13 (330) 321⁄4 (819) 63 (1600) 24 (610) 4 23 1⁄4 x 16 1⁄4 (591 x 413)
30 32 (813) 39¾ (1010) 32½ (826) 393⁄4 (1010) 13 (330) 381⁄4 (972) 65 (1651) 26 (660) 4 24 5⁄8 x 191⁄4 (625 x 489)
36 38 (965) 45¾ (1162) 38½ (978) 453⁄4 (1162) 14 (356) 441⁄4 (1124) 671⁄4 (1708) 28¼ (718) 6 231⁄4 x 221⁄8 (591 x 562)
42 44 (1118) 51¾ (1314) 44½ (1130) 513⁄4 (1314) 15 (381) 501⁄8 (1273) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 6 24 1⁄8 x 25 1⁄8 (613 x 638)
48 50 (1270) 57¾ (1467) 50½ (1283) 573⁄4 (1467) 16 (406) 561⁄8 (1426) 727⁄8 (1851) 34 (864) 12 231⁄4 x 18 3⁄4 (591 x 476)
54 56 (1422) 63¾ (1619) 56½ (1435) 633⁄4 (1619) 17 (432) 623⁄8 (1584) 7911⁄16 (2024) 4011⁄16 (1033) 12 231⁄4 x 20 3⁄4 (591 x 527)
60 62 (1575) 69¾ (1772) 62½ (1588) - 19 (483) - - - -
72 74 (1880) 84¾ (2153) 74½ (1892) - 19 (483) - - - -
All dimensions given in inches (millimeters). Filters are 2 inch (51 mm) nominal thickness. Above filter sizes are actual dimensions.

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 3

8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
5ZQJDBM
*OTUBMMBUJPO
Move fan to the desired location and determine the
method by which the fan is to be mounted as shown
in Figures 1-4 shown on page 3. Optional wall mount
housings (Figure 1) and wall mount collars (Figure
Choose method of support. Attach support to end
of unit (above or below housing) with rods, cable,
angle, etc. (supplied by others) as shown.
Vertical braces must carry a minimum load of 500
pounds per support, and angled (45°) braces a
minimum of 750 pounds per support based on two
supports.
4UFQ
 Install Weatherhood

Wall
Optional 90º
2) provide a convenient means of mounting sidewall Weatherhood

propeller fans while maintaining the proper distance

between propeller and damper.
Attach the fan by inserting a suitable fastener
through each of the prepunched mounting holes in
the fan panel. Care should be taken not to bend or
distort the fan panel or drive components during

Wall
installation.
4VQQPSU
#SBDFT Position weatherhood over end of wall housing
Wall Housing sizes 42 and larger with heavy motors and fasten through mounting holes with self-
and all Filtered Supply Wall Housings need additional tapping screws. Caulk, flash and complete
bracing. electrical hook-up to finish installation.
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ
8BMM
)PVTJOH
*OTUBMMBUJPO 1SF4UBSUJOH
$IFDLT
4UFQ

Install Housing Check all fasteners and setscrews for tightness. This
is especially important for bearing setscrews.
Wall

INTERIOR EXTERIOR The propeller should rotate freely and not rub on the
fan panel venturi. Rotation direction of the propeller
should be checked by momentarily turning the unit
Airflow
on. Propeller blade should cup and throw the air
when rotating in the correct rotation as shown in
Mounting
the figure below. Rotation should be in the same
Angles
direction as the rotation decal affixed to the unit.
Wall

Temporary
Brace

Install housing through wall opening from outside.

Temporarily brace end of unit until permanent
support braces are installed.
Secure through prepunched holes in angles with
suitable fasteners.
4UFQ

Install Support Braces
500 lb. load
per support
750 lb. load
per support
Wall

45º
For 3-phase installations, fan rotation can be
reversed by simply interchanging any two of the
three electrical leads. For single-phase installations
follow the wiring diagram located on the motor.
For Belt Drive Fans: The adjustable motor pulley is
preset at the factory for the specified fan RPM. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by
Wall

45º
opening the adjustable pulley. Two or three groove
variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal
750 lb. load
500 lb. load per support
per support

4 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed
represents a substantial increase in horsepower
required from the motor. Always check motor load
amperage and compare to nameplate rating when
changing fan speed.
3PVUJOF
.BJOUFOBODF
Once the fan has been put into operation, a periodic
maintenance program should be set up to preserve
the reliability and performance of the fan. Items to
be included in this program are: Belts, Bearings,
Fasteners and Setscrews, Lubrication, and Removal
of Dust and Dirt.
8"3/*/(
Always disconnect, lock and tag power source before
installing or servicing. Failure to disconnect power
source can result in fire, shock or serious injury.
#FMUT
Premature belt failures are frequently caused by
improper belt tension (either too tight or too loose) or
misaligned pulleys. The proper tension for operating
a V-belt is the lowest tension at which the belts will
not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning,
the proper belt deflection halfway between pulley
centers is 1/64 inch (0.4 mm) for each inch of belt
span. For example, if the belt span is 64 inches
(1626 mm), the belt deflection should be one inch
(25 mm) using moderate thumb pressure at midpoint
of the drive. See figure shown below.
Slack
Side
Check belt tension two times during the first 24
hours of operation and periodically thereafter. To
adjust belt tension, simply loosen four fasteners
(two on each side of the motor plate) and slide the
motor plate away from the fan shaft until proper
belt tension is attained. On some fans, fasteners
attaching the motor to the motor plate must be
loosened in order to adjust the belt.
It is very important
that the drive pulleys
remain in proper
alignment after
adjustments are
made. Misalignment
of pulleys will result
in premature belt
wear noise, vibration
and power loss.
®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU

4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 5
#FBSJOHT (For belt drive fans only)
Bearings are the most critical moving part of the
fan and should be inspected at periodic intervals.
Locking collars and setscrews, in addition to
fasteners attaching the bearings to the bearing
plate, must be checked for tightness. In a clean
environment and temperatures above 32ºF (0ºC)
and below 200ºF (93ºC), fan shaft bearings with
grease fittings should be lubricated semi-annually
using a high-quality lithium based grease. If unusual
environmental conditions exist, temperatures below
32ºF (0ºC) and above 200ºF (93ºC), moisture or
contaminants, more frequent lubrication is required.
With the unit running, add grease very slowly with
a manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease
forms at the seal. Be careful not to unseat the seal
by over lubricating or using excessive pressure.
Bearings without grease fittings are lubricated for
life.
'BTUFOFST
BOE
4FUTDSFXT
Any fan vibration has a tendency to loosen
mechanical fasteners. A periodic inspection should
include checking all fasteners and setscrews for
tightness. Particular attention should be paid to
setscrews or taper-lock bushings attaching the
propeller to the motor shaft and the motor shaft to
the bearings. Loose bearing setscrews will lead to
premature failure of the fan shaft. In addition, check
all fasteners attaching the motor to the motor plate.
-VCSJDBUJPO
Refer to the paragraph on bearings for bearing
lubrication. Many fractional horsepower motors
installed on the smaller fans are lubricated for life
and require no further attention. Motors equipped
with oil holes should be oiled in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions printed on the motor.
Use a high grade SAE 20 machine oil and use caution
not to over lubricate. Motors supplied with grease
fittings should be greased according to directions
printed on the motor.
3FNPWBM
PG
%VTU
BOE
%JSU
Dirt clogs cooling openings on the motor housing,
contaminates bearing lubricant and collects on
propeller blades causing severe imbalance if left
unchecked. The exterior surface of the motor, fan
panel and entire propeller should be thoroughly
cleaned periodically. Use caution and do not allow
water or solvents to enter the motor or bearings.
Motors or bearings must not be sprayed with steam
or water.
The filters also require periodic cleaning. The 2 inch
(51 mm) washable aluminum filters are accessed
through the bolted access panel.
 5SPVCMFTIPPUJOH
WARNING: Before taking any corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.

PROBLEM CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION

Too Much Airflow Resistance lower than designed Decrease fan speed.
Check backdraft dampers for proper operation. Remove
System resistance too high obstructions in ductwork. Clean dirty filters. Check for adequate
supply air for exhaust fans or exhaust air for supply fans.
Fan too close to damper Increase distance between fan and damper.
Reduced Airflow
Fan speed too low Increase fan speed.

Excessive dirt buildup on

Clean propeller.
propeller

Tighten collars and fasteners. Lubricate bearings. Replace

Bearings
defective bearings.
Tighten pulleys on motor and fan shaft. Adjust belt tension. Align
V-Belt drive
pulleys properly. Replace worn belts or pulleys. See Maintenance.
Clean dirt buildup from propeller. Check all setscrews and
Excessive vibration fasteners for tightness. Check for worn bearing. Correct propeller
Excessive Noise imbalance. Check for loose dampers, guards or ductwork.
Defective motor Replace motor.
Check VFD for drive setting, some controllers are able to be adjust
Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to lower the harmonic noises sometimes heard during operation by
adjusting a simple setting on the controller.
Debris Remove all debris from the fan.

Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for switches turned off or

Electrical Supply
disconnected. Check for correct supply voltage.
Fan Does Not
Drive Check for broken or worn belts. Tighten loose pulleys.
Operate
Assure motor is correct horsepower and not tripping overload
Motor
protector.

.BJOUFOBODF
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
+PC
*OGPSNBUJPO
Job Name:___________________________________ Service Organization: _________________________________
Address: ____________________________________ Address:_____________________________________________
City: ________________________________________ City:_________________________________________________
State: _______________ Zip:__________________ State: _______________ Zip: __________________________
Phone: ______________________________________ Phone: ______________________________________________
Contact Person:______________________________ Work Done By: _______________________________________

/BNFQMBUF
*OGPSNBUJPO
'JFME
4UBSU6Q
%PDVNFOUBUJPO
Model: ______________________________________
Volts: ________ Hertz: ________ Phase: ______ Actual Voltage: _______ Hertz: ______ Phase:_________
Amps:_______________ Mark: ________________ Actual Amperage: ____________________________________
Supply hp:___________ Exhaust hp: __________ Blower Rotation: _____________________________________
Serial Number: _______________________________ Air Volume: Design cfm: _____________________________
Model Voltage: _______________________________ Actual cfm:______________________________
Motor Amperage: ____________________________ Level of fan (L or H): __________________________________
Fan RPM: ___________________________________ Fan RPM Range (min.) ___________ (max.) _____________

6 4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ ®
 1BSUT
-JTU
/05&
Each fan bears a manufacturer’s nameplate with model number and serial number embossed. This information will
assist the local Greenheck representative and the factory in providing service and replacement parts. Before taking any
corrective action, make certain unit is not capable of operation during repairs.
$"65*0/
A fan manufactured with an explosion resistant motor does not certify the entire unit to be explosion proof.

Parts List - Belt Drive

4#&
4#4
4#&
BOE
4#4
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1
2. Propeller
3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
2 4. Motor /Bearing Plate
9 8
5. Motor
6. Motor Pulley
7. Shaft Pulley
8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
10. Belt
4
10
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 5 6 7

4#&
4#4
4#$&
4#$4
BOE
4#$3
-
BOE
)
QSPQFMMFST

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
11 3. Drive Frame Channel (2)
9 4. Motor Plate
4 8
5. Motor
7 6. Motor Pulley
2 7. Shaft Pulley
10 8. Fan Shaft
9. Bearings (2)
6
10. Belt
11. Bearing Plate
5
Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

®
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
t
&YIBVTU
4VQQMZ
BOE
'JMUFSFE
4VQQMZ 7
 Parts List - Direct Drive
4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


%
(
BOE
&
NPUPS
TQFFET

1. Fan Panel
2. Propeller
6 3. Drive Frame/Motor Support
2
4. Motor
5. Riser Blocks (4) - supply fan only
4 6. Shaft Extension- supply fan only

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow

1 3 5

4&
BOE
44
4J[FT

UISV


"
#
BOE
$
NPUPS
TQFFET

4&
BOE
44
4$&
4$4
BOE
4$3

1. Fan Panel
1 2. Propeller
2 3. Drive Frame Channels (2)
4. Motor Plate
5. Motor

Exhaust Supply
Airflow Airflow
3 4 5

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year
from the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at
our option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer
for a period of one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should
be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or
installation costs.
As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog Sidewall Propeller Fans provides additional
information describing the equipment, fan performance,
available accessories, and specification data.
AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for
Users and Installers of Industrial and Commercial
Fans, provides additional safety information. This
publication can be obtained from AMCA International,
Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com
8 
t
4JEFXBMM
1SPQFMMFS
'BOT
*0.
t
3FW

0DUPCFS
 $PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQ
 50AZ/UZ
Packaged Rooftop Cooling
Only Units and Heat Pumps

Serving area : Control building # Main Control Room

Selected model: 50AZ024
Capacity: 21.4 T.R
Qty : 2 working + 2 Stand by

Carrier is participating in the

(XURYHQW&HUWLÀFDWLRQ3URJUDPPH
Products are as listed in the
(XURYHQW'LUHFWRU\RI&HUWLÀHG
3URGXFWV

Installation, operation and maintenance instructions

 CONTENTS

START-UP CHECKLIST..................................................... 3 START-UP............................................................................ 20

Heat pump operation - defrost cycle (50UZ units only) ....... 20
PHYSICAL DATA............................................................. 4, 5 Initial checks ......................................................................... 20

ELECTRICAL DATA....................................................... 4, 5 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION................... 20

DIMENSIONS.................................................................... 6-9 COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT .................................. 20

Service area........................................................................... 10 Description of unit protection devices .................................. 20
Centre of gravity (approx.) ................................................... 10 High pressurestat................................................................... 20
Weight distribution (approx.)................................................ 10 Operating limits .................................................................... 20

FAN PERFORMANCE ................................................. 11-13 SETTING UP PRO-DIALOG PLUS CONTROL ........... 21

RECOMMENDED WIRE SECTIONS ............................ 14
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS.......................................... 14
INSTALLATION ................................................................ 14
Siting the unit........................................................................ 14
Rigging.................................................................................. 14
Unit base frame ..................................................................... 15
Sensor location...................................................................... 16
Ductwork............................................................................... 16
Condensate and rainwater drainage ...................................... 16
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS...................................... 17
Inserting line power leads into unit....................................... 17
Thermostat connection.......................................................... 17
Necessary checks/precautions before start-up ...................... 18
VERIFICATION OF REFRIGERANT CHARGE ......... 18
Refrigerant guidelines........................................................... 18
Recharging liquid refrigerant ................................................ 19
Undercharge .......................................................................... 19
Characteristics of R407C ...................................................... 19
Local interface general features ............................................ 21
Standard human interface ..................................................... 21
Optional enhanced human interface...................................... 22
Unit start/stop control ........................................................... 23
Menus.................................................................................... 24
OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES ...................................... 24
GENERAL MAINTENANCE ........................................... 25
SERVICE............................................................................. 25
Indoor fan air adjustment ...................................................... 25
Lubrication............................................................................ 25
Condenser coil ...................................................................... 26
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME ................................... 26
Maintenance instructions ...................................................... 26
Maintenance schedule........................................................... 26
Description of maintenance operations................................. 27
Servicing recommendations.................................................. 28
FINAL RECOMMENDATIONS....................................... 28
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART...................................... 28

Serving area : Control building Main control room

Selected model: 50AZ024
Capacity: 21.4 T.R
Qty : 2 working + 2 Stand by

The drawings in this document are for illustrative purposes only and is not part of any offer for sale or contract.

2
START-UP CHECK LIST Start up date: ..................................................................

Equipment sold by: ..................................................................................................................... Contract No: ..................................................................

Installed by: ................................................................................................................................. Contract No: .................................................................

Site address: ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Equipment type and serial No: 50AZ ....................................................................................................................................................................................

50UZ ...................................................................................................................................................................................

ELECTRICAL DATA:

Supply voltage Ph 1: ........................... Volts Ph 2: .................... Volts Ph 3: ................... Volts

Nominal voltage: ...................................................... Volts % network voltage: ..................................................................

Current draw Ph 1: ................................ Amperes Ph 2: ................................... Amperes Ph 3: ...................................... Amperes

Control circuit voltage: ................................ Volts Control circuit fuse: ............................................................................................ Amperes

Main circuit breaker rating: .......................................................................................................................................................................................................

PHYSICAL DATA:
Condenser: Evaporator:

o o
Entering air temp.: ...................................................... C Entering air temp.: ....................................................... C
o o
Leaving air temp.: ...................................................... C Leaving air temp.: ....................................................... C

Pressure drop (air): .................................................... kPa Pressure drop (air): ...................................................... kPa

Discharge air pressure: ............................................ Pa Discharge air pressure: ............................................... Pa

Fan motor input: Ph. 1: ................................. Volts Fan motor input: Ph. 1: ................................... Volts

Ph. 2: ................................. Volts Ph. 2: ................................... Volts

Ph. 3: ................................. Volts Ph. 3: ................................... Volts

SAFETY DEVICE SETTING:

High pressure switch: cut-out: ................................................... kPa cut-in: ............................................................... kPa

Low pressure switch: cut-out: ................................................... kPa cut-in: ............................................................... kPa

Step controller: cut-out 1st step: ....................................... oC cut-in 1st step: ................................................. oC

cut-out 2nd step: ..................................... oC cut-in 2 nd step: .............................................. oC

Oil level: ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Oil visible in sight glass? ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................

ACCESSORIES

Commissioning engineer (name): ............................................................................................................................................................................................

Customer agreement

Name: .......................................................................................... Date: ...............................................................................................................

Remarks:

Note: Complete this start-up list at the time of installation

3
 Table 1 - Physical data - 50UZ
50UZ 016 020 024 028 038 042
Nominal cooling capacity* N:      
Nominal heating capacity** N:      
Operating weight NJ      
Refrigerant charge   5&
&LUFXLW$ NJ      
&LUFXLW% NJ      
Compressor Scroll Hermetic Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Quantity, circuit A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Quantity, circuit B - 1 1 1 1 1
2LOFKDUJHHDFK O      
Control type Pro-Dialog Plus
Indoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV 
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Outdoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV 
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Indoor fan One, centrifugal
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXW N:      
1RPLQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHGU\ZHWFRLO 3D      
Outdoor fan Axial Flying Bird fans with rotating shroud
Quantity 1 2 2 2 2 2
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHGKLJKORZVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXWHDFK N:      
$LUÀOWHU Washable
Quantity 4 4 4 4 4 4
:LGWK[KHLJKW PP [ [ [ [ [ [
Thickness mm 15 15 15 15 15 15
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&
** Nominal Eurovent conditions: outdoor air wet bulb temperature of 6o&LQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&

Table 2 - Electrical data - 50UZ

50UZ† 016 020 024 028 038 042
Nominal supply 9SK+] 
Voltage range V
0LQ       
0D[       
Nominal power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Effective power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Nominal current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Effective current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Maximum power input kW
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Maximum current drawn A
&RROLQJ        
+HDWLQJ        
Starting current $      
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&LQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
 %DVHGRQDQRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&   
%DVHGRQDQRXWGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&DQGDQLQGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIƒ&
† Standard unit (without any options and accessories)

4
 Table 3 - Physical data - 50AZ

50AZ 016 020 024 028 034 040

Nominal cooling capacity* N:      
Operating weight NJ      
Refrigerant charge  5&
&LUFXLW$ NJ      
&LUFXLW% NJ      
Compressor Scroll Hermetic Scroll Scroll Hermetic Hermetic
Quantity, circuit A 1 1 1 1 1 1
Quantity, circuit B - 1 1 1 1 1
2LOFKDUJHHDFK O      
Control type Pro-Dialog Plus
Indoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV
Face area m2       
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Outdoor coil  &RSSHUWXEHVSUHFRDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV
Face area m2      
5RZVÀQVSDFLQJ PP      
Indoor fan One, centrifugal
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXW N:      
1RPLQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHGU\ZHWFRLO 3D      
Outdoor fan Axial Flying Bird fans with rotating shroud
Quantity 1 2 2 2 2 2
$LUÁRZ OV      
)DQVSHHGKLJKORZVSHHG UV      
1RPLQDOSRZHULQSXWHDFK N:      
$LUÀOWHU Washable
Quantity 4 4 4 4 4 4
:LGWK[KHLJKW PP [ [ [ [ [ [
Thickness mm 15 15 15 15 15 15
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&

Table 4 - Electrical data - 50AZ

50AZ*** 016 020 024 028 034 040
Nominal supply 9SK+] 
Voltage range V
0LQ       
0D[       
Nominal power input* N:      
Effective power input* N:      
Nominal current drawn* $      
Effective current drawn* $      
Maximum power input** N:      
Maximum current drawn** $      
Starting current $      
 1RPLQDO(XURYHQWFRQGLWLRQVRXWGRRUDLUGU\EXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&LQGRRUDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHRIo&
** Based on an outdoor air dry bulb temperature of 46o&
*** Standard unit (without any options and accessories)

Electrical data notes:

‡ $=8=XQLWVKDYHDVLQJOHSRZHUFRQQHFWLRQSRLQWORFDWHGDWWKHPDLQ  7KHRSHUDWLQJHQYLURQPHQWLVVSHFLÀHGEHORZ
VZLWFK  D (QYLURQPHQW
(QYLURQPHQWDVFODVVLÀHGLQ(1FRUUHVSRQGVWR
• The control box includes the following standard features: ,(&
- a main disconnect switch, starter and motor protection devices for each - outdoor installation (IP24)
compressor, fans and electrical heater option    DPELHQWWHPSHUDWXUHUDQJHƒ&WRƒ&
- the control devices - altitude: bP
• Field connections:  E &RPSHWHQFHRISHUVRQQHOFODVV%$WUDLQHGSHUVRQQHO,(&
All connections to the system and the electrical installations must be in full  3RZHUVXSSO\IUHTXHQF\YDULDWLRQ“+]
DFFRUGDQFHZLWKDOODSSOLFDEOHORFDOFRGHV  7KHQHXWUDO1FRQGXFWRUPXVWQRWEHFRQQHFWHGGLUHFWO\WRWKHXQLWLI
‡ 7KH&DUULHU$=8=XQLWVDUHGHVLJQHGDQGEXLOWWRHQVXUHFRQIRUPDQFH QHFHVVDU\XVHDWUDQVIRUPHU
ZLWKWKHVHFRGHV7KHUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVRI(XURSHDQVWDQGDUG(1  2YHUFXUUHQWSURWHFWLRQRIWKHSRZHUVXSSO\FRQGXFWRUVLVQRWSURYLGHGZLWK
(machine safety - electrical machine components - part 1: general regulations - WKHXQLW
FRUUHVSRQGVWR,(&DUHVSHFLÀFDOO\WDNHQLQWRDFFRXQWZKHQ  7KHIDFWRU\LQVWDOOHGGLVFRQQHFWVZLWFKHVFLUFXLWEUHDNHUVLVDUHRIDW\SH
GHVLJQLQJWKHHOHFWULFDOHTXLSPHQW VXLWDEOHIRUSRZHULQWHUUXSWLRQLQDFFRUGDQFHZLWK(1
NOTES:
‡ *HQHUDOO\WKHUHFRPPHQGDWLRQVRI,(&DUHDFFHSWHGDVFRPSOLDQFH
ZLWKWKHUHTXLUHPHQWVRIWKHLQVWDOODWLRQGLUHFWLYHV&RQIRUPDQFHZLWK(1
LVWKHEHVWPHDQVRIHQVXULQJFRPSOLDQFHZLWKWKH0DFKLQHV'LUHFWLYH
†
‡ $QQH[%RI(1GHVFULEHVWKHHOHFWULFDOFKDUDFWHULVWLFVXVHGIRUWKH
RSHUDWLRQRIWKHPDFKLQHV
 7KHXQLWVDUHGHVLJQHGIRUFRQQHFWLRQWR71QHWZRUNV,(&)RU,7
QHWZRUNVWKHHDUWKFRQQHFWLRQPXVWQRWEHDWWKHQHWZRUNHDUWK3URYLGHD
local earth, consult competent local organisations to complete the electrical
LQVWDOODWLRQ
Caution: If particular aspects of an actual installation do not conform to the
conditions described above, or if there are other conditions which should be
considered, always contact your local Carrier representative.
5
 Fig. 1 - Dimensions, mm

50AZ/UZ 016

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view Front view

Control wiring inlet

(1) Optional air return duct connection Water connections

(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLV
FDVHSRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

6
50AZ/UZ 020

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view
Front view
(1) Optional air return duct connection
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
Control wiring inlet
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLVFDVH
SRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG
Water connections

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

7
50AZ/UZ 024-028

Electrical box
access panel Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view Left side view

Rear view
Front view
(1) Optional air return duct connection Control wiring inlet
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFWFRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLV Water connections
FDVHSRZHUH[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

8
50AZ 034-040/50UZ 038-042

Electrical box
access panel
Main disconnect
switch

Filter access
panel

Right side view

Left side view

Rear view Front view

(1) Optional air return duct connection
(2) Optional power exhaust connection
 $OWHUQDWLYHDLUUHWXUQGXFW
FRQQHFWLRQ,QWKLVFDVHSRZHU Control wiring inlet
H[KDXVWRSWLRQLVQRWXVHG
Water connections

Power wiring inlet

:KHQGHVLJQLQJDQLQVWDOODWLRQDOZD\VXVHXSWRGDWHGUDZLQJVDYDLODEOHIURP\RXUORFDO&DUULHURIÀFH

9
 Fig. 2 - Service area, mm

 PP,IWKHXQLWLQFRUSRUDWHVWKHRSWLRQDOHOHFWULFKHDWHURUWKHRSWLRQDO
hot water coil, or they are to be installed in the future, this clearance should
EHPP

Fig. 3 - Centre of gravity (approx.)

50AZ 016 020 024 028 034 040

XG* mm      
YG* mm      
ZG* mm      
* Measured from point Ñ

50UZ 016 020 024 028 038 042

XG* mm      
YG* mm      
ZG* mm      
* Measured from point Ñ

Fig. 4 - Weight distribution, kg (approx.)

50AZ 016 020 024 028

Å    
Ç    
É    
Ñ    
Ö    
Ü    

50UZ 016 020 024 028

Å    
Ç    
É    
Ñ    
Ö    
Ü    
NOTE: The units have mounting holes in the lower section, to
EHXVHGE\WKHLQVWDOOHULIUHTXLUHG

50AZ 034 040 50UZ 038 042

Å   Å  
Ç   Ç  
É 252 251 É  
Ñ 221 222 Ñ  
Ö   Ö  
Ü   Ü  
á 252 251 á  
à 221 222 à  

10
 Table 5.1 - Fan performance (standard)

50AZ/UZ 016 50AZ/UZ 020

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV    
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333 3611 3944
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN: Standard motor: 4 kW

50AZ/UZ 024 50AZ/UZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 3888 4166 pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166 4750
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4 turns open 3D      ² 4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:      ² UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D      ² 4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:      ² UV N:      ²
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:     6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042*

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 6111 pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 6111
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
Factory setting 3D       Factory setting 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN: 6WDQGDUGPRWRU$=N:8=N:

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 7KHVKDGHGDUHDVGRQRWDSSO\WRWKH8=
kW - Fan power input

Higher than the nominal motor power

11
 Table 5.2 - Fan performance (optional drive - high static pressure)
50AZ/UZ 016 50AZ/UZ 020
0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV    
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333 3611 3944
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open 3D      ²
UV N:       UV N:      ²
Standard motor: 4 kW 6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:    

50AZ/UZ 024 50AZ/UZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 3888 pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166
Closed 3D      Closed 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
1 turn open 3D      1 turn open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
2 turns open 3D      2 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
3 turns open 3D      3 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
4 turns open 3D      4 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
4.5 turns open 3D      4.5 turns open 3D     
UV N:      UV N:     
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:    6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:   

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042

0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV 0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5833 6111 6388 pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5833 6111 6388
Closed 3D       Closed 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D      
UV N:       UV N:      
Standard motor: 11 kW Standard motor: 11 kW

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 
kW - Fan power input

Higher than the nominal motor power

12
 Table 5.3 - Fan performance (optional drive - low static pressure)
50AZ/UZ 016 50UZ/AZ 020
0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZOV
pulley position 2022 2222 2361 2638 2916 3033 pulley position 2611 2777 3055 3333
Closed Pa       Closed 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4 turns open 3D       4 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open  3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:       6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

50UZ/AZ 024 50UZ/AZ 028

0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV
Pulley position 2777 3055 3333 3611 Pulley position 3138 3333 3611 3888 4166
Closed 3D       Closed 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
2 turns open  3D       2 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
4 turns open  3D       4 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
4.5 turns open 3D       4.5 turns open  3D     
UV N:       UV N:     
Standard motor: 4 kW Standard motor: 4 kW

50AZ 034/50UZ 038 50AZ 040/50UZ 042

0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV     0RWRU  $LUÁRZ OV
Pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695 5833 Pulley position 5000 5277 5550 5695
Closed 3D       Closed 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
1 turn open 3D       1 turn open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
2 turns open 3D       2 turns open  3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
3 turns open 3D       3 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
4 turns open  3D       4 turns open 3D    
UV N:       UV N:    
6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:       6WDQGDUGPRWRUN:

Legend:
3D([WHUQDOVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVWDQGDUGÀOWHUVGU\FRLO 
kW - Fan power input

13
RECOMMENDED WIRE SECTIONS
Wire sizing is the responsibility of the installer, and depends on
the characteristics and regulations applicable to each installation
site. The following is only to be used as a guideline, and does
not make Carrier in any way liable. After wire sizing has been
FRPSOHWHGXVLQJWKHFHUWLÀHGGLPHQVLRQDOGUDZLQJWKHLQVWDO
OHUPXVWHQVXUHHDV\FRQQHFWLRQDQGGHÀQHDQ\PRGLÀFDWLRQV
necessary on site. The connections provided as standard for the
ÀHOGVXSSOLHGSRZHUHQWU\FDEOHVWRWKHJHQHUDOGLVFRQQHFW
isolator switch are designed for the number and type of wires,
listed in the table below.
The calculations are based on the maximum machine current
(see electrical data tables) and the standard installation practises,
in accordance with IEC 60364, table 52C.
- The calculation is based on PVC Cu.
- A maximum ambient temperature of 46°C has been taken
into consideration.
IMPORTANT: Before connection of the main power cables
(L1 - L2 - L3) on the terminal block, it is imperative to check
the correct order of the 3 phases before proceeding to the
connection on the main disconnect/isolator switch.
Only for use when repairing "Original Spare Parts". For
repairs, special attention must be paid to the correct installa-
tion of the spare parts. The parts must always be installed in
their original position.
During unit operation, some of the refrigerant circuit elements
could reach a temperature in excess of 70°C so only trained
RUTXDOLÀHGSHUVRQQHOVKRXOGDFFHVVDUHDVSURWHFWHGE\DFFHVV
panels.
This unit should not be installed in an explosive atmosphere.
The unit can operate in normal radioelectric atmospheres in
residential, commercial and light industrial installations. For
other applications, please consult Carrier.
INSTALLATION
1. Inspect shipment. Inspect the unit. If it is damaged, or if
WKHVKLSPHQWLVLQFRPSOHWHLPPHGLDWHO\ÀOHDFODLPZLWK
the shipping company.
2. Check that the local power supply agrees with the
VSHFLÀFDWLRQRQWKHXQLWQDPHSODWH
Siting the unit

- The given wire length limits the voltage drop to < 5% Check the following points:
(length L in metres - see table below). - The location must be able to support the unit operating
weight (see Table 1 and 3).
FLA S min. (mm2) Cable type L (mm)  $OORZVXIÀFLHQWVSDFHIRUVHUYLFLQJDQGDLUÁRZDURXQG
by phase
the unit (see Fig. 2).
 [ 39&&X 
 [ 39&&X  - Select a location free of dust or foreign matter which may
 [ 39&&X  cause coil clogging.
 [ 39&&X 
 [ 39&&X 
- When installing the unit on the ground, select a site which
 [ 39&&X  LVQRWVXEMHFWWRÁRRGLQJ
 [ 39&&X  - Consult all applicable rules and standards which govern
 [ 39&&X 
the installation of air conditioning equipment.
FLA - Full load current, A
- Vibration absorbers should be provided throughout the
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS installation to prevent noise transmission.

Installation and servicing of air conditioning equipment can be Rigging

hazardous due to system pressure and electrical components.
2QO\WUDLQHGDQGTXDOLÀHGVHUYLFHSHUVRQQHOVKRXOGLQVWDOOVWDUW
up or service air conditioning equipment. Untrained personnel
can perform the basic maintenance functions of cleaning and
UHSODFLQJÀOWHUV$OORWKHURSHUDWLRQVVKRXOGEHSHUIRUPHGE\
trained service personnel. When working on air conditioning
equipment, observe precautions in the literature, tags and labels
attached to the unit and other safety precautions that may apply.
1. Use a hoisting chain with a minimum length of 5 m and a
suitable rigging hook to lift the unit (see Fig. 5).
2. To prevent damage while in transit, do not remove the unit
IURPWKHVNLGXQWLOLWLVDWLWVÀQDOORFDWLRQ
3. Never roll or tip the unit more than 15o.
IMPORTANT:0DNHVXUHWKDWDOOXQLWSDQHOVDUHÀ[HGLQ
place before moving. Raise and set down the unit carefully.

Follow all safety codes. Wear safety glasses and work gloves.
Use a quenching cloth for unbrazing operations.

WARNING: Before performing service or maintenance

operations on the unit, turn off the main power switch to the
unit. Electrical shock could cause personal injury.

This unit is designed for ducted installation (indoor air

discharge). If ducts are not used the installer must place a
protection grille in the discharge.

14
 Fig. 5 - Rigging Fig. 6 - Hole for ducts (standard unit)

50AZ/UZ 016-020

PP AIR IN

AIR OUT

50AZ/UZ 024-028

50AZ/UZ a b c d e f g h i j k
PP

          
           

Fig. 7 - Standard discharge and return

50AZ 034-040/50UZ 038-042

PP

See note
Roof slab See note

Air inlet Air outlet

NOTE: Do not drill in this area as damage to basepan and refrigerant lines may
UHVXOWLQZDWHUOHDNDJH

Alternatively, the return air can enter through the rear section
(see Fig. 8). In this case, remove the panel and place it on the
lower section.

Fig. 8 - Return air through unit rear

Unit base frame

Due to the size and weight of the units the base frame must be on
VRPHNLQGRIVXSSRUWZKLFKIXOÀOVWKHIROORZLQJUHTXLUHPHQWV
 7KHVXUIDFHDUHDPXVWEHVXIÀFLHQWIRUGLVWULEXWLQJWKHXQLW
weight over the building structure.
 6XIÀFLHQWGUDLQKROHVVKRXOGEHSURYLGHGWRDYRLGWKH
accumulation of rainwater. Air inlet

 7KHXQLWVKRXOGEHÀUPO\À[HGWRWKHÁRRU
- The structure should be capable of supporting the unit See note
Roof slab See note
weight during installation and operation.
- The standard unit leaves the factory with the air discharge Air outlet
and return in the lower section (see Fig. 7) and the corres-
ponding holes in the support (see Fig. 6) must be made.

15
The unit air discharge and return can be effected through the
side (Fig. 9). In this case, the optional roof curb must be used
after placing the panel covering the return area in the lower
section.
Fig. 9 - Front discharge and return
Air inlet
See note See note
Roof slab -
Air outlet ÀHOGVXSSOLHG
Roof slab
It is necessary to use adequate sealants and joints to ensure
FRUUHFWÀWWLQJDQGZDWHUWLJKWQHVVEHWZHHQWKHGXFWVDQGWKH
support so that air and moisture do not enter the building.
WARNING: Do not drill any holes in the indoor coil area as
this might damage the condensate drain pan.
IMPORTANT: The unit should be correctly levelled to avoid
drainage problems.
Sensor location
Criteria for selecting sensor locations will vary with system
DQGEXLOGLQJVSHFLÀFV5HFRPPHQGHGVHQVRUORFDWLRQVDUH
Ductwork
The ductwork dimensions should be determined in accordance
ZLWKWKHDLUÁRZWREHFDUULHGDQGWKHDYDLODEOHVWDWLFSUHVVXUH
RIWKHXQLW7KHGLIIHUHQWDLUÁRZVDQGVWDWLFSUHVVXUHVZKLFK
each unit can supply, are shown in the fan performance tables.
It is recommended to observe the following considerations:
- Whatever type of ductwork is used, it should not be made
RIPDWHULDOVZKLFKDUHÁDPPDEOHRUZKLFKJLYHRIIWR[LF
JDVHVLQWKHHYHQWRIDÀUH7KHLQWHUQDOVXUIDFHVVKRXOGEH
smooth, and not contaminate the air which passes through.
It is recommended to use sheet metal ducts which are
adequately insulated to avoid condensation and thermal
leakage.
- At the points where the ducts join the unit, it is recom-
PHQGHGWRXVHÁH[LEOHFRQQHFWLRQVZKLFKDEVRUEYLEUD
tions, prevent noise inside the ductwork and allow access
to the unit.
- Bends near the unit outlet should be avoided as much
as possible. If unavoidable, they should be as slight as
SRVVLEOHDQGLQWHUQDOGHÁHFWRUVVKRXOGEHXVHGZKHQWKH
duct has large dimensions.
NOTE: All duct sizing and design work should be carried out
E\TXDOLÀHGWHFKQLFLDQV
Condensate and rainwater drainage
The units incorporate drillholes in the base near the outdoor
coils to drain rainwater and condensation. The indoor heat
exchanger area incorporates a condensate pan with an outside
drain pipe diameter of 23 mm, and a 35 mm diameter drillhole
must be made in the support (see Fig. 11).
Fig. 11 - Condensate drain details
shown in Fig. 10. 'UDLQSLSHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU2'
1. Outdoor temperature sensor
2. Space (ambient) temperature sensor
3. Supply temperature sensor

(2*) if the space temperature sensor is used in a duct, the space

temperature sensor must be selected as same type of supply
temperature sensor.

Fig. 10 - Sensor location

'ULOOKROHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU2'

A drain pipe for evacuating condensate must be incorporated

taking into account the following recommendations:
- Use galvanized steel, copper or plastic piping. Do not use
ordinary garden hose material.
Roof slab - If a rigid material has been used for the drain pipe, it is
necessary to provide an elastic coupling in the drainage
line to absorb possible vibrations.
- It is recommended to incorporate a trap of the appropriate
dimensions (see Fig. 12).
Air outlet
- The drain pipe should always be below the connection
Air inlet itself, and should slope to facilitate drainage.

16
 Fig. 12 - Condensate drain pipe details Example:
Nominal supply: 400-3-50
'UDLQSLSHPPRXWVLGHGLDPHWHU
AB = 404 V
BC = 399 V Motor
AC = 394 V

404 + 399 + 394 = 399 = 400 V

Average voltage =
3

Determine maximum deviation from average voltage:

AB = 404 - 400 = 4
BC = 400 - 399 = 1
Field-supplied AC = 400 - 394 = 6

Largest deviation is 6 volts. Percentage voltage imbalance is

therefore:

6
x 100 = 1.5 %
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS 400

WARNING: To prevent electrical shock or equipment This is less than the permissible 2% and is therefore acceptable.
damage, make sure disconnects are open before electrical
connections are made. If this action is not taken, personal CAUTION: The installer must install protection devices, as
injury may occur. required by the applicable legislation.

Field wiring must comply with all applicable codes. Inserting line power leads into unit

Take special care when making the earth connection. Install air-tight duct conduits in the front panel knock-outs.

Voltage to the unit must be within 2% of the voltage and 10%
of the current indicated on the nameplate. Contact your local
power company for correction of an incorrect line voltage.
Check the voltage before selecting supply wiring fuses and
controls.
WARNING: Operation of the chiller with an improper supply
voltage or excessive phase imbalance constitutes abuse which
will invalidate the Carrier warranty. If the phase imbalance
exceeds 2% for voltage, or 10% for current, contact your local
electricity supply source at once and ensure that the chiller is
not switched on until corrective measures have been taken.
IMPORTANT: To ensure the correct unit power supply
(cable entry, conductor cross section, protection devices etc.),
consult the electrical data table, the wiring diagram supplied
with the unit and the applicable standards concerning the
installation of air conditioning equipment.
Never operate a unit if the voltage imbalance exceeds 2%. The
following formula must be used to determine the percentage of
voltage imbalance.
Voltage imbalance % =
Route all wires through the conduits to terminal blocks in the
control box.
Use copper, copper-clad aluminium or aluminium wire for
power supply.
Thermostat connection
Thermostat/unit connection must be via a loom (wire cross
section depends on the cable length) manufactured in
accordance with the wiring diagram accompanying the unit.
Follow the instructions supplied with the control for thermostat
assembly and handling.
The general rules below should be taken into account:
- Voltage at 24 V AC
- Standard outlet (service C, R, G, Y1/W2,Y1, Y/Y2, O/W2,
W/W1)
- Outlet O is active on cooling
NOTE 1: The thermostat cables should be separate from any
230 V or 400 V cable.

Largest deviation from average voltage

Average voltage

17
Necessary checks/precautions before start-up Refrigerant guidelines

- Ensure that all electrical connections are properly Refrigeration installations must be inspected and maintained
tightened. regularly and rigorously by specialists. Their activities must be
- Ensure that the unit is level and well-supported. overseen and checked by properly trained people. To minimise
- Check the condition of the ductwork in case damage has discharge to the atmosphere, refrigerants and lubricating oil
occurred during installation. must be transferred using methods which reduce leaks and
 7KHDLUÀOWHUVKRXOGEHFOHDQDQGLQSODFH losses to a minimum and with materials that are suitable for the
 $OOWKHSDQHOVVKRXOGEHÀWWHGDQGÀUPO\VHFXUHGZLWKWKH products.
corresponding screws. • Leaks must be repaired immediately
 0DNHVXUHWKDWWKHUHLVVXIÀFLHQWVSDFHIRUVHUYLFLQJDQG • All units are equipped with connections on the suction
maintenance purposes. and liquid line, which permit the connection of refrigerant
- Check the drain connections. recovery valves.
- Ensure that there are no refrigerant leaks. • If the residual pressure is too low to make the transfer
 &RQÀUPWKDWWKHHOHFWULFDOSRZHUVRXUFHDJUHHVZLWKWKH alone, a purpose-built refrigerant recovery unit must be
unit nameplate rating. used.
 0DNHVXUHWKDWFRPSUHVVRUVÁRDWIUHHO\RQWKHPRXQWLQJ • Compressor lubricating oil contains refrigerant. Any oil
springs. drained from a system during maintenance must therefore
be handled and stored accordingly.
WARNING: The compressors are mounted on vibration • Refrigerant under pressure must never be discharged to
isolators. Do not loosen or remove the support mounting the atmosphere.
bolts. • If the refrigerant circuit is opened, plug all openings if the
operation takes up to one day, or charge the circuit with
- Check for proper fan rotation. nitrogen for longer operations.

VERIFICATION OF THE REFRIGERANT CHARGE Apparent and actual subcooling

CAUTION: The 50AZ/UZ units are supplied with a precise 5 4

refrigerant charge (see Physical Data table). 2
3
1
To verify the correct system charge prodeed as follows:
Set unit to cooling mode.
Ensure that no bubbles appear in the sight-glass, when operat-
L 6
ing the unit at full load for a while, at a saturated condensing V
temperature of between 52 and 54°C. If necessary cover a sec-
tion of the coil surface to obtain this condensing temperature.
Pressure

Under these conditions the apparent subcooling which is equal L+V

to the saturated condensing temperature (1 - on the saturated
dew point curve) minus the liquid refrigerant temperature
(3) ahead of the expansion device must be between 8 and
10°C. This corresponds to an actual subcooling temperature
of between 3 and 5 K at the condenser outlet, depending on Enthalpy
the unit type. Actual subcooling is equal the saturated liquid
Legend
temperature (2 - on the saturated bubble point curve) minus
the liquid refrigerant temperature (3) ahead of the expansion 1 Saturated condensing temperature at the dew point
 6DWXUDWHGOLTXLGWHPSHUDWXUHDWWKHEXEEOHSRLQW
device. Use the pressure tap supplied on the liquid piping to  /LTXLGUHIULJHUDQWWHPSHUDWXUH
FKDUJHUHIULJHUDQWDQGWRÀQGRXWWKHSUHVVXUHRIWKHOLTXLG 4 Saturation curve at the dew point
5 Saturation curbe at the bubble point
refrigerant. If the subcooling value is not correct, i.e. lower 6 Isotherms
WKDQWKHVSHFLÀHGYDOXHVDOHDNGHWHFWLRQWHVWPXVWEHFDUULHG  $SSDUHQWVXEFRROLQJ
out on the unit, as it no longer contains its original charge.  5HDOVXEFRROLQJ
/ /LTXLG
/9 /LTXLGYDSRXU
WARNING: To ensure proper operation of 50AZ/UZ V Vapour

units there must be at least 8 K of subcooling as the liquid

refrigerant enters the expansion valve.

The 50AZ/UZ units use refrigerant. For your information,

ZHDUHUHSURGXFLQJKHUHVRPHH[WUDFWVIURPWKHRIÀFLDO
publication dealing with the design, installation, operation
and maintenance of air conditioning and refrigeration
systems and the training of people involved in these activities,
agreed by the air conditioning and refrigeration industry.

18
Recharging liquid refrigerant Undercharge

CAUTION: 50AZ/UZ units are charged with liquid HFC- If there is not enough refrigerant in the system, this is indicated
407C refrigerant. by gas bubbles in the moisture sight glass in the cooling mode.

This non-azeotropic refrigerant blend consists of 23% R-32, ,IWKHXQGHUFKDUJHLVVLJQLÀFDQWODUJHEXEEOHVDSSHDULQWKH

25% of R-125 and 52% R-134a, and is characterised by the
fact that at the time of the change in state the temperature of
the liquid/vapour mixture is not constant, as with azeotropic
refrigerants. All checks must be pressure tests, and the
appropriate pressure/temperature ratio table must be used
to determine the corresponding saturated temperatures
(saturated bubble point curve or saturated dew point curve).
moisture sight glass, and the suction pressure drops. The
compressor suction superheat is also high. The machine must
be recharged after the leak has been repaired.
Find the leak and completely drain the system with a
refrigerant recovery unit. Carry out the repair, leak test and
then recharge the system.

Leak detection is especially important for units charged with
refrigerant R-407C. Depending on whether the leak occurs
in the liquid or in the vapour phase, the proportion of the
different components in the remaining liquid is not the same.
NOTE: Regularly carry out leak checks and immediately
repair any leak found. If there is a leak in the plate heat
exchanger, this part must be replaced.
IMPORTANT: After the leak has been repaired, the circuit
must be tested, without exceeding the maximum low-side
operating pressure shown on the unit name plate.
The refrigerant must always be recharged in the liquid phase
into the liquid line.
The refrigerant cylinder must always contain at least 10% of its
initial charge.
For the refrigerant quantity per circuit, refer to the data on the
unit name plate.

Characteristics of R407C

See the table below.

Saturated bubble point temperatures (bubble point curve)
Saturated dew point temperatures (dew point curve)

Characteristics of R407C

Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew Bar Saturated bubble Saturated dew
(relative) point temp. , °C point temp., °C (relative) point temp., °C point temp., °C (relative) point temp., °C point temp., °C
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        
        

19
START-UP
Actual start-up should only be done under the supervision of a
TXDOLÀHGUHIULJHUDWLRQPHFKDQLF
Heat pump operation - defrost cycle (50UZ units only)
:KHQWKHRXWGRRUWHPSHUDWXUHLVVXIÀFLHQWO\ORZDQGGHSHQGLQJ
on the atmospheric humidity, the water condensing on the
RXWGRRUFRLOIUHH]HVDQGWKLVLPSHGHVFRUUHFWDLUÁRZ,WLV
necessary to remove the ice by changing over the reversing
valve on the solenoid coil. This reverses the system cycle and
injects hot gas into the outdoor heat exchanger. Defrost will be
completed when the outdoor coil reaches the set temperature or
after a predetermined period of time from the start of the cycle.
- Electrically disconnect the compressor and/or remove the
crankcase heater.
- Unbraze or unscrew the suction and discharge lines,
taking care not to damage the rest of the components.
- Remove the fastenings.
 5HSODFHWKHFRPSUHVVRUHQVXULQJWKDWLWFRQWDLQVVXIÀFLHQW
oil.
- Braze or screw in the lines.
- Connect the compressor according to the wiring diagram.
- Evacuate the compressor.
- Fill in the refrigerant charge indicated on the nameplate.
 127(7KLVRSHUDWLRQPXVWEHGRQHE\DTXDOLÀHG
technician.
Description of unit protection devices

Initial checks The unit includes the following compressor protection devices:
- Internal protector for 50AZ/UZ 016-042.
With the unit in operation, ensure that the values shown on - External protector for 50AZ 034-040.
the high and low pressure gauges are within the normal limits. - Outdoor fan motor thermomagnetic switch.
It is advisable to simulate unit shutdown due to high and low - Indoor fan motor thermomagnetic switch.
pressure, in order to make sure that the high pressure switch
works properly. To do so, proceed as follows: High pressurestat
- High pressure shutdown (cooling cycle): Completely cover
the outdoor air inlet, or disconnect the outdoor fan and This protects the unit against excessive condensing pressure.
motor. The unit should stop at a pressure of 28/29.5 bar*.
- Low pressure shutdown (cooling cycle): Cover the indoor 7KHKLJKSUHVVXUHVWDWKDVIDFWRU\À[HGQRQDGMXVWDEOHVHWWLQJV
air inlet, or disconnect the indoor fan and motor. Observe To check, see section Initial checks.
the low pressure gauge. The unit should stop at a pressure
High pressure Low pressure
of 0.55 bar. Min. Max. Min. Max.
36 EDU     
* This value only applies to 50UZ 038/042 units. 76 ƒ&     
3UHVVXUHVZLWFKFXWRXWSUHVVXUH EDU    
7HVWSUHVVXUHXQLWOHDNWHVW EDU 
Check that the motor and compressor consumptions are
7KHVHYDOXHVRQO\DSSO\WR8=XQLWV
approximately the same as those shown on the unit nameplate.
Consumption data is also given in Tables 2 and 4.
WARNING: Alteration of factory settings other than the
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION design setpoint, without manufacturer's authorisation, may
void the warranty.
The refrigerant circuit incorporates the following primary
elements: Operating limits
- Refrigerant-air heat exchanger: made of high quality
FRSSHUWXEHVDQGSUHWUHDWHGDOXPLQLXPÀQV These units have been designed to operate within the following
- Refrigerant lines: made completely of high quality copper. limits:
- %LÁRZH[SDQVLRQYDOYH(except 50UZ 038-042)
- Compressors: scroll compressors for 50AZ/UZ 016, 024, Table 7 - Cooling operation
028, 038, 042 and hermetic compressors for 50AZ/UZ Zone Air temperature
020 and 50AZ 034-040. Dry bulb Wet bulb
- Filter drier (50AZ and 50UZ 038-042) and obus type access Indoor
0D[LPXP ƒ& ƒ&
valve.
- Safety elements: high, low pressure transducer and high Outdoor
0D[LPXP ƒ&  
pressure switch. 0LQLPXP ƒ& 
- All units include the R-407C refrigerant charge necessary
for correct operation. Table 8 - Heat pump operation
- 50UZ 038-042 units include receivers and accumulators.
Zone Air temperature
Dry bulb Wet bulb
COMPRESSOR REPLACEMENT
Indoor
0D[LPXP ƒ&
When an internal fault occurs, the compressor must be
Outdoor
replaced. This must be done as detailed below: 0D[LPXP ƒ& ƒ&
- Disconnect the unit from the electrical supply. 0LQLPXP ƒ& 
- Remove the panels. 8=XQLWVZLOOQRWUXQDWƒ&RXWGRRUDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQFRROLQJPRGHLI
- Remove the gas from the refrigerant circuit using recovery WKHHQWHULQJDLUZHWEXOEWHPSHUDWXUHLVKLJKHUWKDQƒ&7KHPD[LPXPYDOXHZLOO
WKHQEHƒ&
equipment to avoid harming the atmosphere.
20
SETTING UP PRO-DIALOG PLUS CONTROL

Local interface general features

Standard small human interface general features

The interface
It gives access to all PRO-DIALOG PLUS data and operating
functions. It consists of:
• A two-digit display showing the number of the item
selected.
• A four-digit display showing the contents of the item
selected.
• Five buttons and one alarm LED for unit start/stop, menu
selection, menu item selection and value adjustment and
alarm annunciation.

INTERFACE
BUTTON NAME DESCRIPTION
 0HQX 3HUPLWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRIDPDLQPHQX

 8SDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV

  LQFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 'RZQDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV
  GHFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 (QWHU *LYHVDFFHVVWRWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHYDOLGDWHVDPRGLÀFDWLRQRUGLVSOD\VWKHORFDWLRQLQWKHPHQXDQGH[SDQGHGLWHPGHVFULSWLRQ

 6WDUWVWRS $XWKRULVHVVWDUWRUVWRSRIWKHXQLWLQORFDOPRGHRUPRGLÀFDWLRQRILWVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

INTERFACE LEDS
LED INDICATION WHEN LIT
Red LED:
 /LWFLUFXLW$%RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP
- Flashing: circuit A, B or unit running with alarm present

21
Optional enhanced human interface general features
DUAL-CIRCUIT HEAT PUMP INTERFACE DUAL-CIRCUIT COOLING ONLY UNIT INTERFACE

MAIN INTERFACE SUMMARY INTERFACE MAIN INTERFACE SUMMARY INTERFACE

MENU BLOCK MENU BLOCK

The local interface enables a number of operating parameters to Main interface

EHGLVSOD\HGDQGPRGLÀHG It gives access to all PRO-DIALOG PLUS data and operating
functions. It consists of:
The interface consists of two distinct parts: the main interface • A two-digit display showing the number of the item
(left hand section) and the summary interface (right hand selected.
section). • A four-digit display showing the contents of the item
selected.
• LEDs and buttons for unit start/stop, menu selection,
menu item selection and value adjustment.

MAIN INTERFACE
BUTTON NAME DESCRIPTION
 0HQX 3HUPLWVWKHVHOHFWLRQRIDPDLQPHQX(DFKPDLQPHQXLVUHSUHVHQWHGE\DQLFRQ7KHLFRQLVOLWLIDFWLYH

 8SDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV

  LQFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 'RZQDUURZ 3HUPLWVVFUROOLQJWKURXJKWKHPHQXLWHPVLQWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\,IWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLVDFWLYHWKLVEXWWRQDXWKRULVHV
  GHFUHDVHRIWKHYDOXHRIDQ\SDUDPHWHU
 (QWHU *LYHVDFFHVVWRWKHPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHYDOLGDWHVDPRGLÀFDWLRQRUGLVSOD\VH[SDQGHGLWHPGHVFULSWLRQ

 6WDUWVWRS $XWKRULVHVVWDUWRUVWRSRIWKHXQLWLQORFDOPRGHRUPRGLÀFDWLRQRILWVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

MAIN INTERFACE MENU LEDS

LED NAME DESCRIPTION
 ,1)250$7,21PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHJHQHUDORSHUDWLQJSDUDPHWHUVIRUWKHXQLW

 7(03(5$785(6PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWRSHUDWLQJWHPSHUDWXUHV

 kPa 35(6685(6PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWRSHUDWLQJSUHVVXUHV

 6(732,176PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWVHWSRLQWVDQGHQDEOHVWKHPWREHPRGLÀHG

 ,13876PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHVWDWXVRIWKHXQLWGLJLWDODQGDQDORJXHLQSXWV

 28738767(676PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHVWDWXVRIWKHXQLWRXWSXWVDQGHQDEOHVWKHPWREHWHVWHG

 &21),*85$7,216PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHXQLWFRQÀJXUDWLRQDQGHQDEOHVLWWREHPRGLÀHG

 $/$506PHQX 'LVSOD\VDFWLYHDODUPV

 $/$506+,6725<PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHKLVWRU\RIWKHDODUPV

 23(5$7,1*/2*PHQX 'LVSOD\VWKHRSHUDWLQJWLPHVDQGQXPEHURIVWDUWVIRUWKHXQLWDQGWKHFRPSUHVVRUV

22
The summary interface (right hand section) includes a mimic The following operating types can be selected using the
diagram of the unit, together with push-buttons and LEDs. It Start/Stop button:
gives quick access to the main operating parameters of the unit.
OPERATING TYPES
SUMMARY INTERFACE LEDS 4 DIGIT DISPLAY DESCRIPTION
LED INDICATION WHEN LIT  /2)) Local Off.7KHXQLWLVKDOWHGLQORFDOPRGH
Green LED:  /2Q Local On. The unit is in local control mode and is
The unit is authorised to start or is already running DXWKRULVHGWRVWDUW
Red LED:
A
 /LWFLUFXLW$RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP
 /6F  Local On - timer control. The unit is in local control
PRGH,WLVDXWKRULVHGWRVWDUWLIWKHSHULRGLVRFFXSLHG
- Flashing: circuit A or unit running with alarm present If the timer program for unit operation is unoccupied,
B Red LED: the unit remains shut down until the perod becomes
 /LWFLUFXLW%RUXQLWVKXWGRZQE\DODUP RFFXSLHG
- Flashing: circuit B or unit running with alarm present CCN* CCN. 7KHXQLWLVFRQWUROOHGE\&&1FRPPDQGV
Red LED: rEM* Remote. The unit is controlled by remote control
 2SWLRQDODLUÁRZGHWHFWLRQ FRQWDFWV7KLVRSHUDWLQJW\SHVKDOOEHVHOHFWHGZKHQ
Green LED: XVLQJWKH5RRPPDWHFRPIRUWFRQWUROOHURSWLRQ
 7KHLQGRRUIDQLVUXQQLQJ tStA Remote by thermostat. The unit is comtrolled via
Yellow LEDs: H[WHUQDOFRQWDFWVE\DWKHUPRVWDW
 )URPWRSWRERWWRPVWDUWVWRSVWDWXVRIFRPSUHVVRU$RU% Legend
 )ODVKLQJ/('LQGLFDWHVWKDWWKHFLUFXLWLVLQWKHSURWHFWLRQRUGHIURVW  'LVSOD\HGLIWKHFRQÀJXUDWLRQUHTXLUHVLW
 PRGH$RU%
Green LED: Stopping the unit in local mode
 7KHXQLWRSHUDWHVLQKHDWLQJPRGH
Green LED:
The unit can be stopped in local mode at any time by pressing
 7KHXQLWRSHUDWHVLQFRROLQJPRGH the Start/Stop button.

TO STOP THE UNIT

SUMMARY INTERFACE PUSH BUTTONS BUTTON ACTION 2-DIGIT DISPLAY 4-DIGIT DISPLAY
BUTTON DISPLAY  3UHVVWKH6WDUW6WRS & /2))
 %OXHEXWWRQVXSSO\DLUWHPSHUDWXUHUHWXUQDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& button for less than
 *UD\EXWWRQRXWGRRUDLUWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& 4 seconds (one short
 &RQWUROSRLQWVHWSRLQWUHVHWLQƒ&  SUHVVLVHQRXJK
 ,IWKHEXWWRQLV W /2))
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%GLVFKDUJHSUHVVXUHLQN3D released, the unit stops
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VDWXUDWHGFRQGHQVLQJWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ& without the need for
 IXUWKHUDFWLRQ
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VXFWLRQSUHVVXUHLQN3D
 3UHVVFLUFXLW$%VDWXUDWHGVXFWLRQWHPSHUDWXUHLQƒ&
 3UHVVFRPSUHVVRU$%RSHUDWLQJKRXUVLQKRUK Starting unit and selecting an operating type
The unit can be started in local mode, or unit operating type
can be changed at any time using the Start/Stop button. In the
example that follows, the unit is stopped (LOFF) and the user
Unit start/stop control
wants to start the unit in local mode.
Description
The unit start/stop can be controlled by one of the following CHANGING THE OPERATING TYPE
methods: BUTTON ACTION 2-DIGIT 4-DIGIT
DISPLAY DISPLAY
• Locally on the actual unit (Local operating type)
• By remote control with the aid of user contacts (remote  &RQWLQXDOO\SUHVVWKHRSHUDWLQJW\SH & /2))
operating type)  VHOHFWLRQEXWWRQIRUPRUHWKDQVHFRQGV
• By CCN control with the aid of the CCN (CCN operating
 +ROGGRZQWKH6WDUW6WRSEXWWRQ   /2Q
type)  7KHDYDLODEOHRSHUDWLQJW\SHVDUHGLVSOD\HG  /6F
 RQHE\RQHXQWLOWKHEXWWRQLVUHOHDVHG
The main interface includes a Start/Stop button which can be
used to stop or start the unit in the local operating type or to
select the remote or CCN operating type. rEM
 5HOHDVHWKH6WDUW6WRSEXWWRQLIWKH  /2Q
operating type you want is displayed (in
The available operating types are described in the following  WKLVH[DPSOH/2Q&ÁDVKHVLQWKH
table. 2-digit display to show that the controller is
 DZDLWLQJFRQÀUPDWLRQ
 3UHVVWKH(QWHUEXWWRQWRFRQÀUPWKH W /2Q
 RSHUDWLQJW\SHVHOHFWHGLQWKLVH[DPSOH/
 2QWLVGLVSOD\HGLQWKHGLJLWGLVSOD\WR
 LQGLFDWHWKHRSHUDWLQJW\SHVHOHFWHG,IWKH
Enter button is not pressed soon enough
the controller will cancel the change and
 FRQWLQXHWRXVHWKHSUHYLRXVRSHUDWLQJW\SH

23
Menus OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Selecting a menu - Economizer - enthalpic (option)

The MENU button authorises you to select a menu from the 10 - Economizer - thermostatic (option)
main menus that are available. Each time you press this button - Electric heater (option)
one of the 10 LEDs lights up in turn alongside each of the icons - Crankcase heater (option)
representing a main menu. The active menu is the one against - Hot water coil with proportional valve (option)
which the LED is lit. If a menu is empty then its LED is not lit. - Front discharge roof curb (accessory)
To scroll quickly through the menus, hold the MENU button - Vertical roof curb (accessory)
down. - Adjustable longitudinal roof curb, vertical discharge
(accessory)
Selecting a menu item - Adjustable transverse roof curb, vertical discharge
The up and down Arrow buttons let you scroll through the (accessory)
menu items. Menu item numbers are displayed in the two-digit - Air return fan (accessory)
display. The item number increases or decreases every time - Power exhaust (option)
you press the up or down Arrow button. The menu items that  'LUW\ÀOWHUDODUPRSWLRQ
DUHQRWLQXVHRULQFRPSDWLEOHZLWKWKHFRQÀJXUDWLRQDUHQRW
displayed. The value or status associated with the active item
is displayed in the four-digit display. To scroll quickly through
the items, hold the up or down Arrow button down.
The following example shows how to access item 3 in the
Pressures menu.
 +LJKHIÀFLHQF\ÀOWHUVRSWLRQ
- Additional space temperature sensor (accessory)
- Smoke detector (option)
- Economizer hood (option/accessory)
- Programmable thermostat - TSTAT (accessory)
- Non-programmable thermostat - TSTAT (accessory)
- IAQ - indoor air quality sensor (accessory)
- Manual outdoor air damper (option/accessory)
SELECTING A MENU ITEM  $LUÁRZGHWHFWRURSWLRQ
OPERATION PRESS MENU LED* ITEM NUMBER
BUTTON 2-DIGIT
- Barometric exhaust (option)
DISPLAY - High static pressure transmission (option)
Press the MENU button until the - Low static pressure transmission (option)
35(6685(PHQXDSSHDUVRQWKH   
/&',IWKHRSWLRQDOLQWHUIDFHLV
- Room-mate comfort controller (accessory)
XVHGWKH/('PDUNHG35(6685(  kPa  - Enhanced user interface (option)
OLJKWVXS   - Stainless steel drain pan (option)
Press one of the Arrow buttons 1 - Free contact terminal (option)
XQWLOWKHWZRGLJLWGLVSOD\VKRZV
LWHPQXPEHU   kPa
2

   
*Optional interface

Modifying the value of a parameter/access to a sub-menu

Press the Enter button for more than 2 seconds to enter the
PRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHRUWRVHOHFWDVXEPHQX7KLVOHWV\RX
correct the value of an item or select a sub-menu with the aid
of the up and down Arrow buttons (if you are authorised to
RYHUZULWHWKHLWHPFRQFHUQHG:KHQPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHLV
activated, the LED of the main menu to which the item belongs
ÁDVKHVLQWKHPHQXEORFNLIWKHRSWLRQDOLQWHUIDFHLVXVHG

Once the required value is obtained, press the Enter button

again to validate the change or to access the sub-menu. The
LED for the menu to which the item belongs then stops
ÁDVKLQJLQGLFDWLQJWKDWPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHQRORQJHUDSSOLHV

,QPRGLÀFDWLRQPRGHWKHYDOXHWREHPRGLÀHGLQFUHDVHV
or decreases in steps of 0.1 every time you press the Arrow
buttons. Holding one of these buttons down increases the rate
of increase or decrease.

24
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
ATTENTION: Before starting any servicing or maintenance
operation on the unit, make sure that the power supply has
been disconnected. A current discharge could cause personal
injury.
To adjust the belt tension, loosen the motor mounting plate
bolts and slide the motor mounting plate until the belt is as
shown in Fig. 14.
Fig. 13 - Fan speed adjustment

In order to obtain maximum performance from the unit special

attention should be paid to the following points:
- Electrical connections: The supply voltage should be
within the limits permitted by the compressor.

Ensure that no faulty contacts exist in the terminal blocks,

contactor boards, etc. Make sure that all the electrical
connections are properly tightened, and that all the
HOHFWULFDOFRPSRQHQWVFRQWDFWRUVUHOD\VHWFDUHÀUPO\
secured to the corresponding rails.
Pay special attention to the condition of the connecting
cables between the control elements and the electrical Legend
box, and to that of the unit power supply cable. They 1 Motor support 5 Belt
should not be twisted and there should be no slits or 2 Motor pulley 6 Tensioning screw
 6HWVFUHZ  )DQSXOOH\
notches in the insulation. Check the starting and running 4 Motor 8 Fan scroll
FRQVXPSWLRQVDUHZLWKLQWKHOLPLWVVSHFLÀHGLQWKH
corresponding technical information. Fig. 14 - To align fan and motor pulleys
- Drainage: Frequently check that the drain is not
obstructed, and that the condensate pan is clean and level.
 ,QOHWÀOWHUThis should be cleaned periodically. The
frequency depends on the purity of the entering air. The
ÀOWHUPD\EHFOHDQHGZLWKDKRXVHKROGYDFXXPFOHDQHURU
by immersing it in water.
- Refrigerant circuit: Ensure that there is no leakage of
refrigerant or oil from the compressor. Check that the high
and low side operating pressures are normal. Make sure
WKDWWKHFRLOVDUHQRWGLUW\,IQHFHVVDU\DQRSWLRQDOÀOWHU
may be placed at the outdoor air inlet. Check for unusual
compressor noise.
- Controls: Check the operation of all the relays, high and
low pressurestats, etc.

SERVICE

Indoor fan air adjustment  )L[HGÁDQJH

2 Setscrew
 0RYDEOHÁDQJH
The drive is factory set in accordance with the tables on 5.1. 4 Straight-edge must be parallel with belt
 0RWRUDQGIDQVKDIWVPXVWEHSDUDOOHO
6 Pulleys
:KHQLQGRRUSUHVVXUHDQGDLUÁRZUHTXLUHPHQWVGLIIHUIURP
nominal ratings, the motor pulley can be adjusted for different
available static pressure values (see fan performance tables).
Lubrication
To change the fan speed:
1. Move the motor along its track in order to remove the belt.
Both the motors and the fans have factory lubricated and sealed
2. Loosen the pulley setscrews and rotate as necessary.
bearings, and need no further lubrication.
3. Tighten the setscrews.
4. Replace the belt(s) in the channel of the pulley.
The compressor has its own oil supply and oil should not be
5. Tighten the belt(s), using the tension screw nut and
added unless a leak has occurred.
washer. See maintenance section and Fig. 13.

To align fan and motor pulleys:

1. Loosen fan pulley setscrews. Slide fan pulley along the
pulley shaft and align with the motor using a ruler, making
sure that it is parallel to the belt.
2. Tighten the fan pulley setscrews.

25
Condenser coil
:HUHFRPPHQGWKDWÀQQHGFRLOVDUHLQVSHFWHGUHJXODUO\WR
check the degree of fouling. This depends on the environment
where the unit is installed, and will be worse in urban and
industrial installations and near trees that shed their leaves.
For coil cleaning proceed as follows:
‡ 5HPRYHÀEUHVDQGGXVWFROOHFWHGRQWKHFRQGHQVHUIDFH
with a soft brush (or vacuum cleaner).
• Clean the coil with the appropriate cleaning agents.
With pressurised cleaning methods care should be taken not to
GDPDJHWKHFRLOÀQV7KHVSUD\LQJRIWKHFRLOPXVWEHGRQH EN 378-2 can be used.
 LQWKHGLUHFWLRQRIWKHÀQV
 LQWKHRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQRIWKHDLUÁRZGLUHFWLRQ
- with a large diffuser (25-30°)
- at a distance of 300 mm.
It is not necessary to rinse the coil, as the products used are
pH neutral. To ensure that the coil is perfectly clean, we
UHFRPPHQGULQVLQJZLWKDORZZDWHUÁRZUDWH7KHS+YDOXHRI
the water used should be between 7 and 8.
WARNING: Never use pressurized water without a large
diffusor. Concentrated and/or rotating water jets are strictly
forbidden.
Correct and frequent cleaning (approximately every three
months) will prevent 2/3 of the corrosion problems.
1HYHUXVHDÁXLGZLWKDWHPSHUDWXUHDERYHƒ&WRFOHDQWKH
air heat exchangers.
26
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
All maintenance operations must be carried out by technicians
who have been trained on Carrier products, observing all
Carrier quality and safety standards.
Maintenance instructions
During the unit operating life the service checks and tests must be
carried out in accordance with applicable national regulations.
If there are no similar criteria in local regulations, the
information on checks during operation in annex C of standard
External visual checks: annex A and B of standard EN 378-2
Corrosion checks: annex D of standard EN 378-2. These
controls must be carried out:
- After an intervention that is likely to affect the resistance
or a change in use or change of high-pressure refrigerant,
or after a shut down of more than two years. Components
that do not comply, must be changed. Test pressures above
the respective component design pressure must not be
applied (annex B and D).
 $IWHUUHSDLURUVLJQLÀFDQWPRGLÀFDWLRQVRUVLJQLÀFDQW
system or component extension (annex B)
- After re-installation at another site (annexes A, B and D)
- After repair following a refrigerant leak (annex D). The
frequency of refrigerant leak detection can vary from once
per year for systems with less than 1% leak rate per year
to once a day for systems with a leak rate of 35% per year
or more. The frequency is in proportion with the leak rate.
NOTE: High leak rates are not acceptable. The necessary
steps must be taken to eliminate any leak detected.
NOTE 2: Fixed refrigerant detectors are not leak detectors,
as they cannot locate the leak.
Maintenance schedule
Regular maintenance is indispensable to optimise the operating
life and reliability of the equipment. Maintenance operations
must be carried out in accordance with the schedules below:
Service Frequency
A Weekly
B Monthly
C Annually
IMPORTANT: Before each equipment maintenance
operation please ensure that:
- the unit is in the OFF position
- it is impossible for the unit to restart automatically
during maintenance.
Description of the maintenance operations
The equipment is supplied with polyolester oil (POE). Only use
oil approved by Carrier.
Service A
Full-load operating test
Verify the following values:
- compressor high-pressure side discharge pressure
- compressor low-pressure side suction pressure
- charge visible in the sight glass
Verify the alarm status
Service B
Carrier out the operations listed under Service A.
Refrigerant circuit
- Verify the air heat exchanger cleanliness status and clean
it at least once a year, or more often if the equipment
environment is especially demanding. To clean the
equipment, follow the Carrier recommendations. Among
other things, this ensures that the unit performances can be
guaranteed.
- Full-load operating test. In addition to the operations
described under Service A, check the following values:
- compressor discharge pressure
- compressor oil level
- actual liquid subcooling
- overheating at the expansion device
- on heat pumps verify correct defrost of the air heat
exchanger.
- Verify the charge status by checking the colour indicator
of the sightglass. If the colour has turned to yellow,
FKDQJHWKHFKDUJHDQGUHSODFHWKHÀOWHUGULHU$=XQLWV
only) after carrying out a leak test of the circuit.
Electrical checks
- Check the tightening of the electric connections, contactors,
disconnect switch and transformer.
- Check the status of the contactors, fuses and capacitators,
as required.
- Carry out a quick test (refer to the manual for the Rooftop
Pro-Dialog Plus control).
Mechanical checks
- Verify that nothing impedes the rotation of the fan
impeller of the air heat exchanger.
Service C
Carry out the operations listed under Service B.
Refrigerant circuit
- Check the leak-tightness of the circuit and ensure that
there is no piping damage.
- Carry out an oil contamination test. If acid, water or
metallic particles are present replace the oil in the circuit.
- Verify the tightening of the thermostatic mechanism of the
expansion device.
- Full-load operating test. In addition to the checks carried
out under Service B, validate the values of the heat
exchanger inlet and outlet tightening.
- Check the operation of the high-pressure and low-pressure
switches. Replace them if there is a fault.
 &KHFNWKHIRXOLQJRIWKHÀOWHUGULHUE\FKHFNLQJWKH
temperature difference in the copper piping - 50AZ units
only). Replace it if necessary.
Electrical checks
- Check the status of the electrical cables and their insulation.
- Carry out an operating test of the electric evaporator
heaters, compressor crankcase heater, piping and
expansion device, as required.
- Check the phase/earth insulation of the compressors and
fans.
- Check the compressor and fan winding status.
Mechanical checks
- Check the tightening of the indoor and outdoor fan,
FRPSUHVVRUDQGFRQWUROER[À[LQJEROWV
- Check that no water has penetrated into the control box.
- All metallic parts of the unit (chassis, casing panels,
control boxes, heat exchangers etc.) are protected against
corrosion by a coating of powder or liquid paint. To
prevent the risk of blistering corrosion that can appear
when moisture penetrates under the protective coatings,
it is necessary to carry out periodic checks of the coating
(paint) condition.
27
Servicing recommendations FINAL RECOMMENDATIONS

- Before replacing any of the elements in the cooling circuit,
ensure that the entire refrigerant charge is removed from
both the high and low pressure sides of the unit.
- The control elements of the cooling system are highly
sensitive. If they need to be replaced, care should be taken
not to overheat them with blowlamps whilst soldering.
A damp cloth should be wrapped around the component
WREHVROGHUHGDQGWKHÁDPHGLUHFWHGDZD\IURPWKH
component body.
- Silver alloy soldering rods should always be used.
- If the total unit gas charge has to be replaced, the quantity
should be as given on the nameplate and the unit should
be properly evacuated beforehand.
- During unit operation all panels should be in place,
including the electrical box access panel.
- If it is necessary to cut the lines of the refrigerant circuit,
tube cutters should always be used and never tools which
produce burrs. All refrigerant circuit tubing should be of
copper, specially made for refrigeration purposes.
The unit you have purchased has undergone strict quality
control procedures before leaving the factory.
All components, including the control systems and electrical
HTXLSPHQWHWFDUHFHUWLÀHGE\RXU4XDOLW\&RQWURO
Department, and tested under the harshest possible operating
conditions in our laboratories. However, after leaving the
factory, it is possible that one or more of these elements
may be damaged due to causes beyond our control. In such
an event, the user should not work on any of the internal
components, or subject the unit to operating conditions
ZKLFKDUHQRWVSHFLÀHGLQWKLVPDQXDO since serious damage
may result and the guarantee would be invalidated. Repair and
maintenance work should always be left to the installer.
All recommendations concerning unit installation are intended to
be as a guideline. The installer should carry out the installation
according to the design conditions and should comply with all
applicable regulations for air conditioning and refrigeration
installations.

NOTE: The manufacturer does not accept responsibility for

any malfunctions resulting from misuse of the equipment.

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART

A list of possible faults, as well as the probable cause and suggested solutions is shown in Table 9. In the event of a unit
malfunction it is recommended to disconnect the power supply and ascertain the cause.

Table 9 - Troubleshooting chart

Symptoms Cause Remedy

Unit does not start No power supply Connect power supply
Main switch open Close main unit disconnect switch
 /RZOLQHYROWDJH &KHFNYROWDJHDQGUHPHG\WKHGHÀFLHQF\
A protection has tripped Reset
Contactor stuck open Check and if necessary replace contactor
Seized compressor Check and if necessary replace compressor
Unit starts and stops frequently Defective compressor contactor Check and if necessary replace contactor
Defective compressor Check and if necessary replace compressor
Refrigerant losses Check and add the necessary quantity
Unit continuously cuts out at Cooling unit
low pressure Defective low pressure transducer Check and if necessary replace low pressure transducer
Refrigerant losses Check and add the necessary quantity
Indoor fan does not operate Check fan motor
Unit continuously cuts out at Cooling unit
high pressure Defective high pressurestat Check and if necessary replace pressurestat
 %ORFNHGÀOWHUGULHU &KHFNDQGLIQHFHVVDU\UHSODFHÀOWHU
Outdoor fan does not operate Check fan motor

Heat pump unit

Defective high pressurestat Replace pressurestat
Outdoor fan does not operate Check fan motor
Abnormal system noise Piping vibration Support piping
Noisy compressor Check and change if necessary
 %DGO\ÀWWLQJSDQHOV ,QVWDOOFRUUHFWO\
Compressor loses oil Leak in system Repair leak
Water loss Defective drainage connections Check and tighten if necessary

2UGHU1R6XSHUVHGHVRUGHU1R 0DQXIDFWXUHGE\$ODUNR&DUULHU*HE]H7XUNH\
0DQXIDFWXUHUUHVHUYHVWKHULJKWWRFKDQJHDQ\SURGXFWVSHFLÀFDWLRQVZLWKRXWQRWLFH 3ULQWHGLQWKH1HWKHUODQGV
 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PN 455308

Centrifugal Utility Fans

Model SWB (Series 100 & 200)
®
Models SFB and SFD

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Serving area: Control bldg Kitchen
MODEL SWB
selected Model: SWB-212- 5
Qty: 1 Series 200
Capacity : 1001 m3/hr
Exhaust Fan

MODEL SFB
MODEL SWB
Series 100

MODEL SFD

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MOTOR AND DRIVE INSTALLATION (UNITS SHIPPED FROM STOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AFFECT OF INSTALLATION ON PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UL/cUL 762 – RESTAURANT EXHAUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PRE-STARTING CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
BELT DRIVE FAN MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
BEARING LUBRICATION SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MOTOR MAINTENANCE (BELT AND DIRECT DRIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
 MOTOR AND DRIVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(Model SWB units are shipped from stock without motors or drives)

1. Adjust motor pulley to its closed position for

maximum fan speed or increments of 1/2 turn
open (maximum of 5 turns open) for reduced fan
4. Install shaft pulley to fan shaft.
speed. Tighten set screw on flat area only.

2. Install motor pulley to the motor shaft and install 5. Install drive belt(s). Belts should not be forced over
motor to the motor plate. Prepunched holes are pulleys. Align motor and shaft pulleys with a
provided for most common motor frame sizes. straight edge. Tighten all set screws.

3. If supplied, install taperlock bushing into shaft 6. Adjust belt tension. See page 6 for belt tensioning
pulley. instructions.

2
INSTALLATION
Inspect the unit for any damage and report it to the
shipper immediately. Also, check to see that all
accessory items are accounted for.
Move the fan to the desired location and fasten
securely through mounting holes provided in the
base angles. The unit must be set level (shimming
may be necessary). Flexible duct connections and
vibration isolators should be used where noise is a
factor.
The motor voltage and ampere rating must be
checked for compatibility with the electrical supply
AFFECT OF INSTALLATION
ON PERFORMANCE
Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can
cause pre-rotation of incoming air or uneven
loading of the fan wheel, yielding large system
losses, increased sound levels and structural failure
of the fan wheel. Free discharge or turbulent flow in
the discharge ductwork will also result in system
effect losses.
The examples below show the system layout and
inlet and discharge configurations which can affect
fan performance.
Good Poor Poor

prior to final electrical connection. Supply wiring to

the fan must be properly fused and conform to local
and national electrical codes.
Good
Good Poor
The discharge is factory set as specified by
customer order, however, it can be rotated to other
discharge positions in the field if necessary. Not greater than 60°
included angle
Removal of the housing bolts allows the discharge 7° Max.
Good Good Good
to be rotated to the clockwise positions below (Fig.
1). For TAD, BD and BAD discharge positions a
portion of the frame angle must be removed.

Poor Good
VIEWED FROM DRIVE SIDE OF THE FAN
Poor

ONE FAN DIA.

Distance should be at
least 1/2 dia.
CW BH CW BAU CW UB CW TAU Good Poor

Poor

CW TH CW TAD CW DB
CW BAD
Fig. 1

Clockwise rotation shown. Counterclockwise

discharge positions are a mirror image of those
shown. The SWB 100 Series is clockwise rotation
only. Fan rotation is always viewed from the drive
side of the housing.

3
 INSTALLATION OF UL/cUL 762 LISTED FANS FOR RESTAURANT EXHAUST
The UL/cUL 762 listing for restaurant exhaust is available on SWB 200 Series fan sizes 10-36 with a
weatherhood. UL/cUL 762 fans are listed for a maximum operating temperature of 375°F and include a bolted
access door and 1 in. drain
connection. An outlet guard is strongly Series 200 SWB models are
recommended when the fan discharge listed for grease removal (UL/cUL
762) File no. MH11745.
is accessible. An upblast discharge is
recommended. The fan discharge must
Upblast Discharge
be a minimum of 40 in. above the roof Optional
Companion
line and the exhaust duct must be fully Flange
welded to a distance of 18 in. above
the roof surface.
This drawing is for dimensional
40 in.** Weatherhood
information only. See the latest edition 3 Wheel
Diameters
of NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation
Control and Fire Protection of 18 in.*
Commercial Cooking Operations for
detailed installation instructions, Duct
materials, duct connections and ** Per NFPA 96 the fan discharge
From
Kitchen * Per NFPA 96 the duct must be
must be a minimum of 40 in. all welded construction to a
clearances. above the roof surface. Hood
minumum distance of 18 in.
above the roof surface.

PRE-STARTING CHECKS
Wheels must rotate freely and not rub on the inlet venturi. Model SWB Overlap
wheels overlap the inlet venturi as shown in Figure 2. Refer to the SWB
fan wheel overlap and radial gap chart for proper dimensions. Radial
Gap

Models SFD and SFB wheels do not overlap the venturi, but have a Wheel

gap between the inlet venturi and the wheel (Fig. 3). Wheel position is
preset at the factory and the unit is test run. Wheel movement may
occur during shipment or installation and wheel alignment may be
necessary.

APPROXIMATE WHEEL CLEARANCE DIMENSIONS

SWB SFD SFB
Unit Overlap (inches) Radial Gap GAP GAP MODEL SWB
Size Series Series (inches) (in.) (in.)
100 200 Fig. 2
6 - - - 3/8 -
7 - - - 3/8 -
9 - - - 1/2 1/2
10 3/8 1/4 5/32 1/2 1/2 Gap
12 3/8 - 5/32 - 1/2
13 7/16 1/4 5/32 - 1/2
15 1/2 1/4 5/32 - 1/2 Wheel
16 1/2 1/4 5/32 - -
18 5/8 3/8 5/32 - 1/2
20 5/8 3/8 5/32 - 5/8
22 11/16 - 5/32 - 5/8
24 3/4 3/8 5/32 - -
25 - - - - 3/4
27 7/8 - 3/16 - 3/4
30 15/16 1/2 3/16 - 3/4
33 1-1/16 - 3/16 - - MODEL SFD OR SFB
36 1-3/16 1/2 3/16 - -
Fig. 3
4
On belt drive units, centering can be accomplished by (1) loosening the inlet cone bolts to move the inlet cone
or by (2) loosening the bearings in order to move the shaft. Wheel and inlet cone overlap can be adjusted by
loosening the wheel hub set screw and moving the wheel to the desired position. Tighten all fasteners and set
screws securely and realign drive pulleys after adjustment. Check pulleys and belts for proper alignment to
avoid unnecessary belt wear, noise, vibration and power loss. Motor and drive shafts must be parallel and
pulleys in line (Fig. 4)

Wrong Wrong Right

Fig. 4

The adjustable motor pulley is set at the factory for the fan RPM specified by the customer. Fan RPM can be
increased by closing or decreased by opening the adjustable motor pulley. Multi-groove variable pitch pulleys
must be adjusted an equal number of turns open or closed. Any increase in fan speed represents a substantial
increase in load on the motor.

To avoid motor overheating and possible burnout, motor load amperes should always be checked and
compared to nameplate rating when fan speed is increased.

WHEELS VIEWED FROM THE DRIVE SIDE

Rotation direction of the wheel is critical and Backward Inclined Rotation

incorrect rotation will result in reduced air
performance, increased motor loading and n
ti o

possible motor burnout. Airflow

R ota

Check wheel rotation by momentarily

energizing the unit and noting if rotation is in
the same direction as the airflow at the outlet
and conforms to the rotation decal affixed to Forward Curved
Rotation
the unit (Fig. 5). NOTE: Models SFD and SFB
units should be operated only when attached
to the system for which they were designed.
Without proper system static pressure the
R ota

motor could be seriously overloaded.

ti o

Airflow n

Fig. 5

WARNING
DISCONNECT AND SECURE TO THE “OFF” POSITION ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE FAN PRIOR
TO INSPECTION OR SERVICING. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS SAFETY PRECAUTION COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

5
BLOWER MAINTENANCE (BELT DRIVE)
Be careful not to unseat the seal by over lubricating
Belts tend to stretch after a period of time. They or using excessive pressure. A guide to the amount of
should be periodically checked for tension and wear. grease to be used is to fill 30% to 60% of available
When replacing belts, use the same type as supplied space in the bearing and housing.
with the unit. Replacement of belts should be
accomplished by loosening the tensioning “L-bolts” A high quality lithium based grease conforming to
so the belts may be removed by hand. Do not force NLGI Grade 2 consistency, such as those listed
belts on or off as this may cause breakage of cords below, should be used.
and lead to premature belt failure.
Mobil 532
Belt tension should be adjusted to allow 1/64 in. of Mobilux #2
belt deflection per 1 in. of belt span. For example, a B Shell Alvania #2
16 in. belt span should have 16/64 in. or 1/4 in. of Texaco Multifak #2
deflection with moderate thumb pressure at mid-point Texaco Premium #2
between the pulleys. (Fig. 6). Unirex N2

Belt Span In addition to lubricating the bearings at specified

intervals, set screws in the bearing collars should be
checked for tightness. A bearing collar which has
loosened will cause premature failure of the fan shaft.
Fasteners attaching the bearings to the drive frame
should also be checked.

MOTOR MAINTENANCE
Deflection = Belt Span (BELT AND DIRECT DRIVE)
64
Fig. 6
Motor maintenance is generally limited to cleaning
Shaft bearings are the most critical moving part of a and lubrication (where applicable). Cleaning should be
fan. Therefore, special attention should be given to limited to exterior surfaces only. Removing dust and
keeping the bearings clean and well lubricated. grease build-up on the motor housing assures proper
Proper lubrication provides for reduction in friction motor cooling. Use caution and do not allow water or
and wear, transmission and dissipation of heat, solvents to enter the motor or bearings. Under no
extended bearing life and prevention of rust. circumstances should motors or bearings be sprayed
with steam, water or solvents.
In order for a lubricant to fulfill these tasks, the proper
grease applied at regular intervals is required. See the Greasing of motors is intended only when fittings are
recommended bearing lubrication schedule. provided. Many fractional horsepower motors are
BEARING LUBRICATION SCHEDULE permanently lubricated for life and require no further
FOR GREENHECK UTILITY FANS lubrication. Motors supplied with grease fittings
should be greased in accordance with the
(Relubrication schedule in months) manufacturer’s recommendations.
Shaft Diameter in inches
Fan RPM
3/4 to 11⁄2 13⁄4 to 2
WHEEL AND FASTENER
To 500 6 6 MAINTENANCE
500-1000 6 5
1000-1500 5 4 Wheels require very little attention when exhausting
1500-2000 4 3 clean air, however air heavily laden with grease or dirt
2000-2500 4 2 will tend to accumulate on the wheel causing
2500-3000 3 1 unbalance. Wheels exhausting dirty or grease laden
3000-3500 2 1 air require frequent cleaning to assure smooth and
safe operation.
If unusual conditions exist - temperatures below 32°F
or above 200°F, moisture or contaminants - more All fasteners, including set screws in the bearing
frequent lubrication is required. collars, should be checked for tightness each time
maintenance checks are performed.
With the unit running add grease very slowly with a
manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease forms A proper maintenance program will help preserve the
at the seal. performance and reliability designed into the fan.
6
 PARTS LIST

4
7
6
5

2
3
9

10

11
12 14
13
Always provide the unit model and serial number when requesting parts or information.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

1. Scroll housing 6. Drive frame assembly 11. Motor pulley

2. Drive frame - Base angle 7. Pillow block bearings 12. Belt tensioning bolts
3. Intake support panel 8. Fan shaft 13. Motor plate
4. Inlet ring and cone 9. Shaft pulley 14. Motor
5. Wheel (Specify rotation) 10. Belt

7
 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Corrective Action
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel
Wheel Rubbing Inlet
hub or bearing collars on shaft.
Tighten sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust
belt tension. Align sheaves properly
V-Belt Drive
Excessive (see page 4). Replace worn belts
Noise or sheaves.
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate
Bearings
bearings. Tighten collars & fasteners.
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel
Wheel Unbalance
balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Check wheel for correct rotation.
Low Fan
Increase fan speed.*
CFM
Duct System See page 4.
Fan Decrease fan speed.
High
Resize ductwork. Access door,
CFM Duct System
filters, grills not installed.
Duct system has Change obstructions in system. Use
Static more or less correction factor to adjust for
Pressure restriction than temperature/altitude. Resize ductwork.
Wrong anticipated Clean filters/coils. Change fan speed.*
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce
Fan
fan speed.
High
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation
Horsepower Duct
of face and bypass dampers. Check
System filters and access doors.
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for
Electrical
switches off. Check for correct
Supply supply voltage.
Fan
Doesn’t Check for broken belts. Tighten
Drive
Operate loose pulleys.
Assure motor is correct horsepower
Motor
and not tripping overload protector.
Check for excessive or insufficient grease
Lubrication
in the bearing.
Overheated
Bearing Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive
Mechanical belt tension. Align bearings.
Check for bent shaft.
NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
*Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and
result in burnout.

WARRANTY
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the
purchase date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option
when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one
year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest
authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
PH. 715-359-6171 IOM SWB/SFB/SFD FS
® www.greenheck.com Rev. 4 June 2005
Copyright © 2005 Greenheck Fan Corp.
 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PN 455308

Centrifugal Utility Fans

Model SWB (Series 100 & 200)
®
Models SFB and SFD

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Serving area: Control bldg Toilets
MODEL SWB
selected Model: SWB-213- 5
Qty: 1 Series 200
Capacity : 1799 m3/hr
Exhaust Fan

MODEL SFB
MODEL SWB
Series 100

MODEL SFD

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MOTOR AND DRIVE INSTALLATION (UNITS SHIPPED FROM STOCK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
AFFECT OF INSTALLATION ON PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
UL/cUL 762 – RESTAURANT EXHAUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
PRE-STARTING CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 5
BELT DRIVE FAN MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
BEARING LUBRICATION SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
MOTOR MAINTENANCE (BELT AND DIRECT DRIVE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
TROUBLESHOOTING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
 MOTOR AND DRIVE INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
(Model SWB units are shipped from stock without motors or drives)

1. Adjust motor pulley to its closed position for

maximum fan speed or increments of 1/2 turn
open (maximum of 5 turns open) for reduced fan
4. Install shaft pulley to fan shaft.
speed. Tighten set screw on flat area only.

2. Install motor pulley to the motor shaft and install 5. Install drive belt(s). Belts should not be forced over
motor to the motor plate. Prepunched holes are pulleys. Align motor and shaft pulleys with a
provided for most common motor frame sizes. straight edge. Tighten all set screws.

3. If supplied, install taperlock bushing into shaft 6. Adjust belt tension. See page 6 for belt tensioning
pulley. instructions.

2
INSTALLATION
Inspect the unit for any damage and report it to the
shipper immediately. Also, check to see that all
accessory items are accounted for.
Move the fan to the desired location and fasten
securely through mounting holes provided in the
base angles. The unit must be set level (shimming
may be necessary). Flexible duct connections and
vibration isolators should be used where noise is a
factor.
The motor voltage and ampere rating must be
checked for compatibility with the electrical supply
AFFECT OF INSTALLATION
ON PERFORMANCE
Restricted or unstable flow at the fan inlet can
cause pre-rotation of incoming air or uneven
loading of the fan wheel, yielding large system
losses, increased sound levels and structural failure
of the fan wheel. Free discharge or turbulent flow in
the discharge ductwork will also result in system
effect losses.
The examples below show the system layout and
inlet and discharge configurations which can affect
fan performance.
Good Poor Poor

prior to final electrical connection. Supply wiring to

the fan must be properly fused and conform to local
and national electrical codes.
Good
Good Poor
The discharge is factory set as specified by
customer order, however, it can be rotated to other
discharge positions in the field if necessary. Not greater than 60°
included angle
Removal of the housing bolts allows the discharge 7° Max.
Good Good Good
to be rotated to the clockwise positions below (Fig.
1). For TAD, BD and BAD discharge positions a
portion of the frame angle must be removed.

Poor Good
VIEWED FROM DRIVE SIDE OF THE FAN
Poor

ONE FAN DIA.

Distance should be at
least 1/2 dia.
CW BH CW BAU CW UB CW TAU Good Poor

Poor

CW TH CW TAD CW DB
CW BAD
Fig. 1

Clockwise rotation shown. Counterclockwise

discharge positions are a mirror image of those
shown. The SWB 100 Series is clockwise rotation
only. Fan rotation is always viewed from the drive
side of the housing.

3
 INSTALLATION OF UL/cUL 762 LISTED FANS FOR RESTAURANT EXHAUST
The UL/cUL 762 listing for restaurant exhaust is available on SWB 200 Series fan sizes 10-36 with a
weatherhood. UL/cUL 762 fans are listed for a maximum operating temperature of 375°F and include a bolted
access door and 1 in. drain
connection. An outlet guard is strongly Series 200 SWB models are
recommended when the fan discharge listed for grease removal (UL/cUL
762) File no. MH11745.
is accessible. An upblast discharge is
recommended. The fan discharge must
Upblast Discharge
be a minimum of 40 in. above the roof Optional
Companion
line and the exhaust duct must be fully Flange
welded to a distance of 18 in. above
the roof surface.
This drawing is for dimensional
40 in.** Weatherhood
information only. See the latest edition 3 Wheel
Diameters
of NFPA 96 Standard for Ventilation
Control and Fire Protection of 18 in.*
Commercial Cooking Operations for
detailed installation instructions, Duct
materials, duct connections and ** Per NFPA 96 the fan discharge
From
Kitchen * Per NFPA 96 the duct must be
must be a minimum of 40 in. all welded construction to a
clearances. above the roof surface. Hood
minumum distance of 18 in.
above the roof surface.

PRE-STARTING CHECKS
Wheels must rotate freely and not rub on the inlet venturi. Model SWB Overlap
wheels overlap the inlet venturi as shown in Figure 2. Refer to the SWB
fan wheel overlap and radial gap chart for proper dimensions. Radial
Gap

Models SFD and SFB wheels do not overlap the venturi, but have a Wheel

gap between the inlet venturi and the wheel (Fig. 3). Wheel position is
preset at the factory and the unit is test run. Wheel movement may
occur during shipment or installation and wheel alignment may be
necessary.

APPROXIMATE WHEEL CLEARANCE DIMENSIONS

SWB SFD SFB
Unit Overlap (inches) Radial Gap GAP GAP MODEL SWB
Size Series Series (inches) (in.) (in.)
100 200 Fig. 2
6 - - - 3/8 -
7 - - - 3/8 -
9 - - - 1/2 1/2
10 3/8 1/4 5/32 1/2 1/2 Gap
12 3/8 - 5/32 - 1/2
13 7/16 1/4 5/32 - 1/2
15 1/2 1/4 5/32 - 1/2 Wheel
16 1/2 1/4 5/32 - -
18 5/8 3/8 5/32 - 1/2
20 5/8 3/8 5/32 - 5/8
22 11/16 - 5/32 - 5/8
24 3/4 3/8 5/32 - -
25 - - - - 3/4
27 7/8 - 3/16 - 3/4
30 15/16 1/2 3/16 - 3/4
33 1-1/16 - 3/16 - - MODEL SFD OR SFB
36 1-3/16 1/2 3/16 - -
Fig. 3
4
On belt drive units, centering can be accomplished by (1) loosening the inlet cone bolts to move the inlet cone
or by (2) loosening the bearings in order to move the shaft. Wheel and inlet cone overlap can be adjusted by
loosening the wheel hub set screw and moving the wheel to the desired position. Tighten all fasteners and set
screws securely and realign drive pulleys after adjustment. Check pulleys and belts for proper alignment to
avoid unnecessary belt wear, noise, vibration and power loss. Motor and drive shafts must be parallel and
pulleys in line (Fig. 4)

Wrong Wrong Right

Fig. 4

The adjustable motor pulley is set at the factory for the fan RPM specified by the customer. Fan RPM can be
increased by closing or decreased by opening the adjustable motor pulley. Multi-groove variable pitch pulleys
must be adjusted an equal number of turns open or closed. Any increase in fan speed represents a substantial
increase in load on the motor.

To avoid motor overheating and possible burnout, motor load amperes should always be checked and
compared to nameplate rating when fan speed is increased.

WHEELS VIEWED FROM THE DRIVE SIDE

Rotation direction of the wheel is critical and Backward Inclined Rotation

incorrect rotation will result in reduced air
performance, increased motor loading and n
ti o

possible motor burnout. Airflow

R ota

Check wheel rotation by momentarily

energizing the unit and noting if rotation is in
the same direction as the airflow at the outlet
and conforms to the rotation decal affixed to Forward Curved
Rotation
the unit (Fig. 5). NOTE: Models SFD and SFB
units should be operated only when attached
to the system for which they were designed.
Without proper system static pressure the
R ota

motor could be seriously overloaded.

ti o

Airflow n

Fig. 5

WARNING
DISCONNECT AND SECURE TO THE “OFF” POSITION ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE FAN PRIOR
TO INSPECTION OR SERVICING. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS SAFETY PRECAUTION COULD
RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

5
BLOWER MAINTENANCE (BELT DRIVE)
Be careful not to unseat the seal by over lubricating
Belts tend to stretch after a period of time. They or using excessive pressure. A guide to the amount of
should be periodically checked for tension and wear. grease to be used is to fill 30% to 60% of available
When replacing belts, use the same type as supplied space in the bearing and housing.
with the unit. Replacement of belts should be
accomplished by loosening the tensioning “L-bolts” A high quality lithium based grease conforming to
so the belts may be removed by hand. Do not force NLGI Grade 2 consistency, such as those listed
belts on or off as this may cause breakage of cords below, should be used.
and lead to premature belt failure.
Mobil 532
Belt tension should be adjusted to allow 1/64 in. of Mobilux #2
belt deflection per 1 in. of belt span. For example, a B Shell Alvania #2
16 in. belt span should have 16/64 in. or 1/4 in. of Texaco Multifak #2
deflection with moderate thumb pressure at mid-point Texaco Premium #2
between the pulleys. (Fig. 6). Unirex N2

Belt Span In addition to lubricating the bearings at specified

intervals, set screws in the bearing collars should be
checked for tightness. A bearing collar which has
loosened will cause premature failure of the fan shaft.
Fasteners attaching the bearings to the drive frame
should also be checked.

MOTOR MAINTENANCE
Deflection = Belt Span (BELT AND DIRECT DRIVE)
64
Fig. 6
Motor maintenance is generally limited to cleaning
Shaft bearings are the most critical moving part of a and lubrication (where applicable). Cleaning should be
fan. Therefore, special attention should be given to limited to exterior surfaces only. Removing dust and
keeping the bearings clean and well lubricated. grease build-up on the motor housing assures proper
Proper lubrication provides for reduction in friction motor cooling. Use caution and do not allow water or
and wear, transmission and dissipation of heat, solvents to enter the motor or bearings. Under no
extended bearing life and prevention of rust. circumstances should motors or bearings be sprayed
with steam, water or solvents.
In order for a lubricant to fulfill these tasks, the proper
grease applied at regular intervals is required. See the Greasing of motors is intended only when fittings are
recommended bearing lubrication schedule. provided. Many fractional horsepower motors are
BEARING LUBRICATION SCHEDULE permanently lubricated for life and require no further
FOR GREENHECK UTILITY FANS lubrication. Motors supplied with grease fittings
should be greased in accordance with the
(Relubrication schedule in months) manufacturer’s recommendations.
Shaft Diameter in inches
Fan RPM
3/4 to 11⁄2 13⁄4 to 2
WHEEL AND FASTENER
To 500 6 6 MAINTENANCE
500-1000 6 5
1000-1500 5 4 Wheels require very little attention when exhausting
1500-2000 4 3 clean air, however air heavily laden with grease or dirt
2000-2500 4 2 will tend to accumulate on the wheel causing
2500-3000 3 1 unbalance. Wheels exhausting dirty or grease laden
3000-3500 2 1 air require frequent cleaning to assure smooth and
safe operation.
If unusual conditions exist - temperatures below 32°F
or above 200°F, moisture or contaminants - more All fasteners, including set screws in the bearing
frequent lubrication is required. collars, should be checked for tightness each time
maintenance checks are performed.
With the unit running add grease very slowly with a
manual grease gun until a slight bead of grease forms A proper maintenance program will help preserve the
at the seal. performance and reliability designed into the fan.
6
 PARTS LIST

4
7
6
5

2
3
9

10

11
12 14
13
Always provide the unit model and serial number when requesting parts or information.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

1. Scroll housing 6. Drive frame assembly 11. Motor pulley

2. Drive frame - Base angle 7. Pillow block bearings 12. Belt tensioning bolts
3. Intake support panel 8. Fan shaft 13. Motor plate
4. Inlet ring and cone 9. Shaft pulley 14. Motor
5. Wheel (Specify rotation) 10. Belt

7
 TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Corrective Action
Adjust wheel and/or inlet cone. Tighten wheel
Wheel Rubbing Inlet
hub or bearing collars on shaft.
Tighten sheaves on motor/fan shaft. Adjust
belt tension. Align sheaves properly
V-Belt Drive
Excessive (see page 4). Replace worn belts
Noise or sheaves.
Replace defective bearing(s). Lubricate
Bearings
bearings. Tighten collars & fasteners.
Clean all dirt off wheel. Check wheel
Wheel Unbalance
balance, rebalance in place if necessary.
Check wheel for correct rotation.
Low Fan
Increase fan speed.*
CFM
Duct System See page 4.
Fan Decrease fan speed.
High
Resize ductwork. Access door,
CFM Duct System
filters, grills not installed.
Duct system has Change obstructions in system. Use
Static more or less correction factor to adjust for
Pressure restriction than temperature/altitude. Resize ductwork.
Wrong anticipated Clean filters/coils. Change fan speed.*
Check rotation of wheel. Reduce
Fan
fan speed.
High
Resize ductwork. Check proper operation
Horsepower Duct
of face and bypass dampers. Check
System filters and access doors.
Check fuses/circuit breakers. Check for
Electrical
switches off. Check for correct
Supply supply voltage.
Fan
Doesn’t Check for broken belts. Tighten
Drive
Operate loose pulleys.
Assure motor is correct horsepower
Motor
and not tripping overload protector.
Check for excessive or insufficient grease
Lubrication
in the bearing.
Overheated
Bearing Replace damaged bearing. Relieve excessive
Mechanical belt tension. Align bearings.
Check for bent shaft.
NOTE: Always provide the unit model and serial numbers when requesting parts or service information.
*Always check motor amps and compare to nameplate rating. Excessive fan speed may overload the motor and
result in burnout.

WARRANTY
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from the
purchase date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option
when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one
year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the nearest
authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
PH. 715-359-6171 IOM SWB/SFB/SFD FS
® www.greenheck.com Rev. 4 June 2005
Copyright © 2005 Greenheck Fan Corp.
 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PN 453148

Serving area: Control bldg Stairwell

Qty : 1
Selected Model: RSFP-200- 100 Roof Supply Fans
® Capacity : 26567 m3/hr
Pressurization Fan
Models RSF and RSFP

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Model RSF

Model RSFP

Greenheck Model RSF and RSFP fans are thoroughly inspected and test run at the factory, however damage
may occur during handling and shipping. Consequently, it is important to inspect the unit for visible and
concealed damage before beginning installation. Report any damage to the shipper immediately. In addition,
assure all accessory items are accounted for.

Dimensional Data
B SQ. BL SQ.

F
C CL

J
D D
G H
2 1/2 in. 2 1/2 in.
A
A SQ. A SQ.
BASE OF UNIT
RSF RSFP
M
Louver Weights
Fan A B BL K L Nominal
C CL D F G H J M Tiers
Size SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. Filter RSFP RSF RSFP L K
SQ. SQ.
90 26 351/8 317/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 121/4 103/4 75/8 67/8 241/2 121/4 61/8 (4) 12x20 3 145 126
100 30 411/8 357/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 135/8 117/8 91/16 83/16 281/2 141/4 71/8 (4) 12x25 3 173 146
120 34 471/8 397/8 271/4 293/8 101/4 161/8 137/8 101/16 815/16 321/2 181/4 71/8 (4) 16x25 4 225 180 M
150 40 531/8 457/8 311/4 333/8 101/4 191/8 161/2 111/4 107/16 381/2 201/4 91/8 (8) 16x20 5 336 250
(4) 16x20 M
180 46 611/8 517/8 341/4 353/8 121/4 221/2 191/2 101/8 113/4 441/2 261/4 91/8 5 400 285
(4) 20x20
OPTIONAL DUCT ADAPTER
200 52 731/8 583/16 391/4 403/8 121/4 231/4 251/4 133/8 143/8 501/2 301/4 101/8 (8) 20x25 6 620 431
All dimensions are in inches.

1
Lifting
Lifting the RSF and RSFP model fans must be done with care to avoid
damaging the housing. For Model RSF attach four lifting devices under the
outer housing, each device beneath the vertical row of fasteners (Fig. 1).
Lifting devices should be a minimum of 3 in. wide to avoid damaging the
sheet metal housing. Do not lift Model RSF near the center of the outer
housing. Fig. 1
For Model RSFP attach a minimum of four lifting devices under an exterior
louver panel, each device near the corner of the louvered housing. Lift Here
Lift Here

Installation
Move the fan to its intended location and fasten it securely through mounting holes provided in the fan base. Shims may be
necessary depending upon thickness of the roofing material. For ducted applications, an optional duct adapter (if provided)
is attached and holds the ductwork in place prior to installing the unit. The following diagram shows a typical installation
with prefab roof curb and ductwork.

TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Curb Recom. Duct Nominal
Fan Roof Size Damper
Size* Opening ID Size
RSF unit with prepunched RSF/RSFP- 90 241/2 15 12 12 x 12
mounting holes and 21/2 inch
RSF/RSFP- 100 281/2 17 14 14 x 14
skirt to aid in installation.
RSF/RSFP- 120 321/2 21 18 18 x 18
Ductwork (by others) RSF/RSFP- 150 381/2 23 20 20 x 20

Duct adapter (optional) allows RSF/RSFP- 180 441/2 29 26 26 x 26

ductwork to be completed
prior to setting unit on curb.
Roof Curb
RSF/RSFP- 200 501/2 33 30 30 x 30
All dimensions are in inches.
Note: In cases where extreme snow depths may be
encountered, extended base may be required to raise unit
or condensation pans may be required in ductwork.
*Recommended curb size shown is outside curb
dimension without roofing and flashing.

Access to the motor compartment is made by releasing four latches which secure the cover. The cover should be placed in
an area where wind will not blow it off the roof.

Electrical Connection
The electrical supply must be compatible with the fan motor with regard to voltage, phase and amperage capacity.
Moreover, the electrical supply line must be properly fused and conform to local and national electrical codes.
Electrical lead-in wires should be routed through the pre-punched hole in the optional duct adapter (if provided) and the
punched hole in the bottom of the fan housing. Electrical wires must be located so as not to rub on moving components.
The electrical supply line is connected to the optional safety disconnect switch (if provided) or wired directly to the motor.

Pre-Starting Checks

Note: For units shipped with motor and drives separate, refer to the Motor Mounting Instructions included in the hardware
bag.

WARNING!
DISCONNECT AND SECURE TO THE “OFF” POSITION ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE FAN PRIOR TO INSPECTION OR
SERVICING. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS SAFETY PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

Check all fasteners and set screws for tightness. Rotate the fan wheel by hand
to assure it turns freely and is centered between the inlets. Check pulleys and
belts for proper alignment to avoid premature belt wear, noise, vibration and
power loss. Motor and fan pulleys must be parallel and in line (Fig. 2).

The adjustable motor pulley is set at the factory for the fan RPM specified. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by opening the adjustable
motor pulley. Two groove variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal WRONG WRONG CORRECT
Fig. 2
2
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed results in an increase in horsepower required for the motor. Motor load
amperes should always be checked and compared to nameplate rating when changing fan speed.

Direction of fan wheel rotation is critical. A fan wheel rotating in the wrong
ROTATIO ROT
AT
direction will result in reduced airflow, motor overloading and possible burn- N

IO
out. Check wheel rotation by momentarily turning the fan on.

N
Rotation should be in the same direction as airflow at the outlet. See housing
and wheel examples in Fig. 3. IMPORTANT NOTE: RSF/RSFP fans should be
operated only when attached to the completed system. Without proper
static pressure loading, the motor may be overloaded and burnout may
occur.
Fig. 3 AIRFLOW

Routine Maintenance - See WARNING Page 2

To preserve the reliability and performance designed into the fan, regularly scheduled maintenance should be performed.
Items to be checked at each maintenance interval are filters, belts, bearings, fasteners, lubrication and removal of dust and
dirt.

Filters
1 inch washable aluminum mesh filters are standard on Model RSF and RSFP fans. (Optional 2 inch filters may be supplied
on some fans). Filters should be cleaned on a regular basis for optimum efficiency.

To remove the filters, first remove the fan cover by releasing the four latches. (Place the cover in an area where wind will not
blow it off the roof). The filters can be lifted out and washed in a mild detergent solution. If desired, an adhesive spray
available at most filter distributors can be applied to increase filter efficiency.

Belts
Belt tension should be checked two times during the first 24 hours of
operation and during each scheduled maintenance thereafter. Premature belt
failures are frequently caused by improper belt tension, either too tight or
loose. The proper belt tension for operating a V-belt is the lowest tension at Belt Span
which the belt will not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning, belt
deflection should be 1/64 inch for each inch of belt span, determined by using
moderate thumb pressure half way between pulley centers. For example, the
belt deflection should be 1/2 inch if the belt span is 32 inches (Fig. 4).

Belt tension can be adjusted by loosening the motor plate hinge bolts and
adjusting the jack screws as required. RSF/RSFP units are supplied with Deflection =
either a painted steel motor bracket or a galvanized motor plate for larger Belt Span
motor frames. To adjust belt tension on units equipped with the painted steel 64
motor bracket, simply adjust the single jack screw. Fig. 4

For units equipped with a galvanized motor plate, both jack screws must be adjusted equally. Check pulley and belt
alignment after adjusting belt tension (Fig. 2).

Lubrication
Fan bearings on Model RSF and RSFP are permanently lubricated. Motor bearings equipped with grease fittings should be
lubricated in accordance with instructions on the motor nameplate. Motors without grease fittings are lubricated for life.

Cleaning
Motors and Fan Wheels require periodic cleaning to remove dust and dirt which may accumulate. Motor cleaning should be
limited to the exterior surface only. Removing dust and dirt from the motor housing assists in motor cooling and prolongs
motor life. Motors should never be sprayed with steam, water or solvents.
Fan wheels which are left to accumulate dust and dirt will have poor air performance, loss of efficiency and possible
damaging vibration due to an unbalanced condition.

Periodic cleaning is a good investment in preserving the reliability and performance designed into the fan.

3
 PARTS LIST

Blower Unit

Filters
*Motor Plate

Shaft Pulley
Motor

Blower Mounting Angle

Motor Pulley

Belt
Shock Mounts (4)

*Galvanized motor plate shown. Painted steel motor bracket used on units with smaller motor frame sizes.

Note: The unit serial number, located on the Greenheck name tag, should be provided when requesting parts or
information.

Warranty
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from
the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our
option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid.
The motor is warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should the motor furnished by Greenheck
prove defective during this period, it should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck
will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
PH. 715-359-6171
® www.greenheck.com
RSF/RSFP IOM
#453148 Rev 2 Dec 2004
Copyright © 2004 Greenheck Fan Corp.
 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

CW Pump House # Ventilation Fans

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 P.O. Box 410
Schofield, WI 54476

Phone: 715.359.6171
www.greenheck.com

PROTECTING AND REPAIRING THE FINISH

These recommendations are intended to assist architects, contractors, owners, building managers,
etc., who are concerned with the care and maintenance of painted &/or anodized architectural
aluminum. The information contains suggested methods as an aid in establishing safe, sound
cleaning and maintenance procedures.

TODAY'S HIGH QUALITY PAINTED AND ANODIZED FINISHES ARE EXTREMELY

DURABLE. But even the best finish needs a little TLC; and with the most careful treatment of
the louvers or architectural products during installation and daily use, occasional damage will
occur.

This article discusses the recommended care of painted or anodized finishes on architectural
metal and looks at three levels of concern: Care and Cleaning, Minor Repairs, and More
Complex Refinishing.

The Care and Cleaning of Painted Material

Today’s factory applied heat-cured painted finishes are durable and very colorfast. The Kynar
and Hylar based products that meet the AAMA 2605 specification and/or ASCA 96 with trade
names such as Duranar by PPG, Fluropon by Valspar or Trinar by Akzo-Nobel are warranted to
retain their color and gloss level for many years. However, to assure that they retain their original
beauty, even these highly durable finishes should be cleaned occasionally. When selecting a
cleaning solution use mild soap solutions that are safe for use with your bare hands such as those
products that one would use to wash a car. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners as they
may damage the finish.

Solvents no stronger than mineral spirits or denatured alcohol may be used to remove grease,
sealants or other materials. Never mix cleaners or cleaners and solvents as the resultant mixture
can cause harmful or even dangerous results. Do not use abrasive cleaners or materials such as
steel wool or abrasive brushes, which can also harm the surface.

Once heavy soil, grease or sealant is removed the mild soap solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or soft brush. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth.

In coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas containing heavy industrial
pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular basis. For example cleaning the painted
finish can be scheduled as a part of the regular maintenance program for glass cleaning.
Cleaning Anodized Material
Anodized material has an extremely hard surface that is very colorfast and mar resistant. The
Class I clear or color anodized finishes applied by a computer automated, high quality
commercial anodizer specializing in architectural finishing will provide consistent color and long
product life in a variety of applications.

Much like painted surfaces, an anodized finish should be cleaned using mild soap solutions to
retain its original beauty. Products that are safe for use with bare hands including most
commercial cleaning products can be safely used. The cleaning solution should be applied with a
soft cloth, sponge or brush. Avoid the use of strong acid or alkali cleaners.

Severely soiled anodized surfaces can be cleaned a little more aggressively than painted surfaces.
For example, slight scuffmarks and rub marks on an anodized surface can be removed with a
mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brite pad. Use the pad to remove the mark, then clean the
surface using the mild soap solution. Rinse the surface thoroughly with clean water and dry with
a soft cloth.

As with painted surfaces, in coastal areas where the finish is exposed to salt spray or in areas
containing heavy industrial pollutants the cleaning should take place on a regular maintenance
program.

Field Touch Up
It is almost a given that some damage will occur and touchup work will be required during or
after installation. But the good news is that both painted and anodized surface damage can be
easily repaired if the damage is slight such as a scratch or rub mark. Minor painted surface
damage can be sanded prior to touchup painting with excellent results. For scratches or gouges
use a relatively course grit paper to remove the damage, then use progressively finer paper to
remove the sanding marks, finishing with a 180 to 220 grit paper.

Sanding of anodized material that is going to be touched up is not recommended. The anodized
surface is aluminum oxide, which is generally harder than the sandpaper. Some rub marks on an
anodized surface can be removed with a mild abrasive pad such as the Scotch-Brits pad prior to
touch up painting.

Custom finishers usually supply a limited mount of touch-up paint with the project material.
Touchup paint is supplied in small aerosols or bottles with a built in brush for easy application
and is to be applied very sparingly. It is intended to cover small blemishes or to touchup exposed
cut ends on fabricated parts. It is not intended for use on large areas of more than a few square
inches. The color will closely match the factory applied painted or anodized finish, however the
finish is not as hard nor performance the same as the baked on finishes. After cleaning the area to
be touched up, wipe the area with denatured alcohol to remove any moisture or cleaning residue
and apply the touchup per the finisher’s instructions. Use caution as excessive use of touch up
paint may void the original finisher’s warranty.
 Part #458066
Model LSF Assembly

Assembly Instructions
Serving area: CWP House bldg
Qty : 4
Selected Model: LSF-36- 100
Capacity: 41230 m3/hr
Supply Fan

How to use this manual

Read and save these instructions. This manual is designed to assist with the assembly of Greenheck Model LSF
Louvered Supply Fans. It contains detailed assembly instructions, parts and hardware lists, as well as step-by-
step renderings.

Complete descriptions and renderings of all parts and hardware items can be found on pages 2-4. Procedures
described in this manual should be followed in the order they appear.

Receiving and Handling

Upon receiving the equipment, check for both obvious and hidden damage. If damage is found, record all
necessary information on the bill of lading and file a claim with the final carrier. Check to be sure that all parts of
the shipment, including accessories and hardware, are present.

NOTE
Rooftop assembly is recommended. Fan should be
assembled on previously mounted roof curb.

®
Model LSF Assembly 1
 LSF 24, 27 AND 30

7
2

5 3

1
9 8
4

PARTS LIST
Item No. Description Quantity
1 Louver Assembly, End 2
2 Louver Assembly, Side 2
3 Base Panel 4
4 Filters See page 12
5 Blower Assembly
6 Curb Adapter Panel (shown upside down) 4
7 Hood Panel, Center 1
8 Reinforcing Angle for Base Panel 2
9 Gusset 4
Hardware Package #821385 See page 4

2 Model LSF Assembly ®

 LSF 33 AND 36

8
7

11

3 1
4
5
10 9

PARTS LIST
Item No. Description Quantity
1 Louver Assembly, End 2
2 Louver Assembly, Side, with Spacer 2
3 Base Panel 4
4 Filters See page 12
5 Blower Assembly
6 Curb Adapter Panel (shown upside down) 4
7 Hood Panel, Center 1
8 Hood Panel, Side 2
9 Reinforcing Angle for Base Panel 2
10 Gusset 4
11 Hood Support Rail 2
Hardware Package #821246 See page 4

®
Model LSF Assembly 3
 LSF 24 - 30 LSF 33 - 36
Hardware Hardware
HARDWARE PACKAGE AND FASTENER DETAILS Package Package
#821385 #821246
Part
Item Description Quantity
Number
415006 Sheet Metal Screw, Indented Hex Washer, Zinc Plated, #14 x 1-1/2 inch 6 6
415203 Sheet Metal Screw, Phillips Oval Head, Stainless Steel, #10 x 1-1/4 inch 96 96
415439 Sheet Metal Screw, Indented Hex Washer, Stainless Steel, #12 x 5/8 inch 70 70
415041 Thread Cutting Screw, Indented Hex Washer Head, Zinc Plated, 5/16 inch - 18 x 1 inch 21 33
415005 Thread Cutting Screw, Indented Hex Washer Head, Zinc Plated, 3/8 inch - 16 x 1 inch 2 2
415225 Thread Cutting Screw, Indented Hex Washer Head, Zinc Plated, 5/16 inch - 18 x 5/8 inch 0 8
415729 Machine Screw, Phillips Truss Head, Stainless Steel, 1/4 inch - 20 x 5/8 inch 10 0
415486 Serrated Flange Fastener (Whiz Lock Screw), Zinc Plated, 5/16 inch - 18 x 1 inch 8 8
415837 Lock Washer, Stainless Steel, 1/4 inch 10 0
415457 Nut, Serrated, Zinc Plated, 3/8 inch - 16 2 2
415456 Nut, Zinc Plated, 5/16 inch - 18 8 8
415099 Nut, Stainless Steel, 1/4 inch - 20 10 0
415220 Tinnerman Clip, 5/16 inch - 18 21 21
370022 Grommet, Neoprene 1 1
450023 Rod, Retainer Pin (not shown) 4 0
506023 Louver Bracket (not shown) 4 0
Note: Depending on unit size, all hardware may not be used. Drawing is not to scale.

415006 415203 415439 415041

415005 415225 415729 415486 415837

415457 415456 415099 415220 370022

4 Model LSF Assembly ®
Step 1
Locate and identify parts as listed on Parts List
and Hardware Package and Fastener Details
List on pages 2 and 3. See exploded view for
assistance in identifying parts.

Step 2
Place duct adapter panels upside down so that
the screws can be inserted into the predrilled
holes in the flanges. Fasten the panels together
as shown using the #12 x 5/8 inch stainless sheet
metal screws.

Step 3
Install the neoprene grommet in wiring hole.

Step 4
Flip over the duct adapter panels and apply 3/4 x
3/4 inch gray adhesive-backed foam tape to top
of duct adapter around the edge of the opening
at the proper location; noting the size of the unit.
(The roll of foam tape will be attached to the
blower assembly).

Sizes 24, 27, 30 – flush with edge, all around

Size 33 – flush with edge on long sides, 3/4 inch

away from edge on short sides

Size 36 – flush with edge on long sides, 1-1/4 inch

away on short sides

Step 5
Mount assembled duct adapter onto preexisting
roof curb. Align the adapter squarely on the curb
and nail through the prepunched mounting holes
(nails not provided).

Step 6
Place and align the blower assembly on the duct
adapter—being sure to place the motor near the
wiring hole in the duct adapter. NOTE: Blower
frame will extend 3/4 inch over each end of the
curb. Make sure the frame is centered on the curb.

Step 7
Using the 1/4 inch x 1-1/2 inch lag bolts, fasten
the blower assembly to the curb aligning the
prepunched holes in the blower assembly and
duct adapter.

Step 8
Locate the two (2) wood shipping blocks between
blower assembly frame and isolation base.
Remove and discard the hardware and the blocks.

Step 9
To begin installation of the base panels, remove
the lifting lugs. Save the lifting lugs and mounting
hardware. They will be reused in Step 10.

®
Model LSF Assembly 5
Step 10
Set one (1) end panel in place on the end of the
support frame.

Replace the lifting lugs, reusing the hardware

to fasten the panel in place. Do not tighten the
hardware completely until instructed to do so. Use
a 3/8 inch-16x1 inch thread cutting screw in the
center of the end base panel between the lifting
lugs. Do not tighten completely Repeat Step 10 for
the other end base panel.

Step 11
Install reinforcing angle on the two (2) side base
panels. Use #12 x 5/8 inch stainless sheet metal
screws for each reinforcing angle.

Step 12
Place the side base panel with reinforcing angle
on the duct adapter and fasten at both ends using
#12 x 5/8 inch stainless metal screws along both
vertical edges. Repeat Step 12 for the other side
base panel.

Step 13
Install corner gussets on the surface of the duct
adapter and fasten to the bottom corners of the
base panels, using four (4) #12 x 5/8 inch stainless
sheet metal screws in each gusset.

Step 14
Tighten the two (2) bolts in each lifting lug as well
as the one in the center of the base panel that
were not tightened in Step 10.

6 Model LSF Assembly ®

Step 15
Install Tinnerman clips in the slots preprunched at
the top of the base panels.

Step 16
Set one (1) section of the end louver assemblies
(without a cover) in place on an end base panel
(panels with lifting lugs). Fasten posts on louver
assemblies with 5/16 inch-18x1 inch thread
cutting screws, using the prepunched holes in the
posts and Tinnerman clips already installed in the
base panels. Repeat Step 16 for opposite louver
end assembly.

LSF Sizes 24–30 continue on page 8

STOP LSF Sizes 33–36 continue on page 10

®
Model LSF Assembly 7
 LSF Sizes 24, 27 and 30

Step 17
Set in place one (1) side louver assembly (with
hood panel). Use 5/16 inch -18 x 1 inch thread
cutting screws to fasten posts to base panels as
in Step 16. Using #12 x 5/8 inch stainless sheet
metal screws, fasten the corner posts of the
adjoining sides together at the top and bottom.
Use four (4) screws per louver assembly. Repeat
Step 17 for opposite side louver assembly.

Step 18
Fasten mitered louver corners with #10 x 1-1/4 inch
sheet metal screws.

Step 19
Slide the filters into their racks using the diagram
on page 12 as a guide for proper size, location and
orientation of the filters.

8 Model LSF Assembly ®

 LSF Sizes 24, 27 and 30

Step 20
Set center hood cover on top of louver
assemblies. Slowly close the side hood panels,
one at a time, adjusting the center section
slightly—if necessary—to attain a proper
alignment of all three hood panels.

Step 21
To secure the center hood, locate the center hood
latch. Mark where the slot meets the top louver.
Drill a 9/64 inch hole and insert one (1) sheet metal
screw through center hood latch and top louver.
Repeat Step 21 for opposite side of center hood.

Step 22
Set in place hasp bracket through hood latch.
Hold hasp bracket in place and swing hood panel
open. Mark hasp hole locations on top louver and
drill 1/4 inch holes at each mark. Insert one (1) 1/4
inch - 20 x 1/2 inch machine screw through the
hasp bracket and top louver. Fasten by attaching
one (1) 1/4 inch lock washer and one (1) 1/4 inch
x 20 hex nut to each screw. Follow the same
procedure for the other end of the hood. Repeat
Step 22 for the opposite side hood.

Step 23
Close side hood panels and insert rod retainer pin Fasten
through louver bracket to secure side hood panel. Here
Join side hoods to center hood along hood seams
using four (4) 5/16 inch - 18 x 1 inch serrated
flange fasteners and four (4) 5/16 inch - 18 nuts on
each flange.

Step 24
Using prepunched mounting holes in base panels,
fasten unit to roof curb nailer (fasteners not
provided).

Completed LSF
Size 24, 27 or 30

®
Model LSF Assembly 9
 LSF Sizes 33 and 36

Step 17
Set in place one (1) side louver assembly with
spacer. Use 5/16 inch -18 x 1 inch thread cutting
screws to fasten posts to base panels as in Step
16. Using #12 x 5/8 inch sheet metal screws,
fasten louver spacer to corner post of end
assembly at the top and bottom. Use four (4)
screws per louver assembly. Repeat Step 17 for
opposite side louver assembly.

Step 18
Fasten mitered louver corners with #10 x 1-1/4 inch
sheet metal screws.

Step 19
Slide the filters into their racks using the diagram
on page 12 as a guide for proper size, location and
orientation of the filters.

10 Model LSF Assembly ®

 LSF Sizes 33 and 26

Step 20
Set in place hood support rails over center posts,
leaving one (1) post between for spacing. Use 5/16
inch - 18 x 5/8 inch thread cutting screws to fasten
hood support rails to center posts; four (4) screws
per center post.

Step 21
Set center hood cover on top of hood support
rails. Align slots in center hood to holes in hood
support rails.

Step 22
Set side hood cover panels on top of unit, one
on each side of center hood. Use thread cutting
screws to fasten hood panels to corner mount
brackets and hood support rails. Join side hoods
to center hood along hood seams using four (4)
5/16 inch - 18 x 1 inch serrated flange fasteners
and four (4) 5/16 inch - 18 nuts on each flange.

Step 23
Using prepunched mounting holes in base panels,
Fasten
fasten unit to roof curb nailer (fasteners not Here
provided).

®
Model LSF Assembly 11
 LSF Filter Sizes and Quantities
All sides are identical.

Size 24 Size 27 Size 30

16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 25 16 x 20 16 x 25 16 x 25 16 x 25

16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 20 16 x 25 16 x 20 20 x 25 20 x 25 20 x 25

Size 33 Size 36

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 25 20 x 25 20 x 20

20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 20 x 20 25 x 20 25 x 25 25 x 25 25 x 20

Unit Size
Filter
24 27 30 33 36
Size
16 x 20 24 16

20 x 20 32 8

20 x 25 12 16

16 x 25 8 12

25 x 25 8

Warranty

Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from
the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our option
when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid. Motors are warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of
one year. Should motors furnished by Greenheck prove defective during this period, they should be returned to the
nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications
without notice.

Greenheck Catalog LSF provides additional information AMCA Publication 410-96, Safety Practices for Users and
describing the equipment, fan performance, available Installers of Industrial and Commercial Fans, provides
accessories, and specification data. additional safety information. This publication can be
obtained from AMCA International, Inc. at: www.amca.org.

1IPOF



t
'BY



t
&NBJM
HGDJOGP!HSFFOIFDLDPN
t
Website: www.greenheck.com

12 
t
-4'
"TTFNCMZ
3FW

"VHVTU

$PQZSJHIU

ª
(SFFOIFDL
'BO
$PSQPSBUJPO

 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

CW Pump Electrical Equipment Bldg
# Ventilation Fans & AC Units

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 READ AND SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS PN 453148

Serving area: CWPE Equipment bldg

Qty : 2
Selected Model: RSFP-200- 30 Roof Supply Fans
® Capacity : 14462 m3/hr
Supply Roof Fan
Models RSF and RSFP

Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual

Model RSF

Model RSFP

Greenheck Model RSF and RSFP fans are thoroughly inspected and test run at the factory, however damage
may occur during handling and shipping. Consequently, it is important to inspect the unit for visible and
concealed damage before beginning installation. Report any damage to the shipper immediately. In addition,
assure all accessory items are accounted for.

Dimensional Data
B SQ. BL SQ.

F
C CL

J
D D
G H
2 1/2 in. 2 1/2 in.
A
A SQ. A SQ.
BASE OF UNIT
RSF RSFP
M
Louver Weights
Fan A B BL K L Nominal
C CL D F G H J M Tiers
Size SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. SQ. Filter RSFP RSF RSFP L K
SQ. SQ.
90 26 351/8 317/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 121/4 103/4 75/8 67/8 241/2 121/4 61/8 (4) 12x20 3 145 126
100 30 411/8 357/8 231/4 253/8 101/4 135/8 117/8 91/16 83/16 281/2 141/4 71/8 (4) 12x25 3 173 146
120 34 471/8 397/8 271/4 293/8 101/4 161/8 137/8 101/16 815/16 321/2 181/4 71/8 (4) 16x25 4 225 180 M
150 40 531/8 457/8 311/4 333/8 101/4 191/8 161/2 111/4 107/16 381/2 201/4 91/8 (8) 16x20 5 336 250
(4) 16x20 M
180 46 611/8 517/8 341/4 353/8 121/4 221/2 191/2 101/8 113/4 441/2 261/4 91/8 5 400 285
(4) 20x20
OPTIONAL DUCT ADAPTER
200 52 731/8 583/16 391/4 403/8 121/4 231/4 251/4 133/8 143/8 501/2 301/4 101/8 (8) 20x25 6 620 431
All dimensions are in inches.

1
Lifting
Lifting the RSF and RSFP model fans must be done with care to avoid
damaging the housing. For Model RSF attach four lifting devices under the
outer housing, each device beneath the vertical row of fasteners (Fig. 1).
Lifting devices should be a minimum of 3 in. wide to avoid damaging the
sheet metal housing. Do not lift Model RSF near the center of the outer
housing. Fig. 1
For Model RSFP attach a minimum of four lifting devices under an exterior
louver panel, each device near the corner of the louvered housing. Lift Here
Lift Here

Installation
Move the fan to its intended location and fasten it securely through mounting holes provided in the fan base. Shims may be
necessary depending upon thickness of the roofing material. For ducted applications, an optional duct adapter (if provided)
is attached and holds the ductwork in place prior to installing the unit. The following diagram shows a typical installation
with prefab roof curb and ductwork.

TYPICAL INSTALLATION
Curb Recom. Duct Nominal
Fan Roof Size Damper
Size* Opening ID Size
RSF unit with prepunched RSF/RSFP- 90 241/2 15 12 12 x 12
mounting holes and 21/2 inch
RSF/RSFP- 100 281/2 17 14 14 x 14
skirt to aid in installation.
RSF/RSFP- 120 321/2 21 18 18 x 18
Ductwork (by others) RSF/RSFP- 150 381/2 23 20 20 x 20

Duct adapter (optional) allows RSF/RSFP- 180 441/2 29 26 26 x 26

ductwork to be completed
prior to setting unit on curb.
Roof Curb
RSF/RSFP- 200 501/2 33 30 30 x 30
All dimensions are in inches.
Note: In cases where extreme snow depths may be
encountered, extended base may be required to raise unit
or condensation pans may be required in ductwork.
*Recommended curb size shown is outside curb
dimension without roofing and flashing.

Access to the motor compartment is made by releasing four latches which secure the cover. The cover should be placed in
an area where wind will not blow it off the roof.

Electrical Connection
The electrical supply must be compatible with the fan motor with regard to voltage, phase and amperage capacity.
Moreover, the electrical supply line must be properly fused and conform to local and national electrical codes.
Electrical lead-in wires should be routed through the pre-punched hole in the optional duct adapter (if provided) and the
punched hole in the bottom of the fan housing. Electrical wires must be located so as not to rub on moving components.
The electrical supply line is connected to the optional safety disconnect switch (if provided) or wired directly to the motor.

Pre-Starting Checks

Note: For units shipped with motor and drives separate, refer to the Motor Mounting Instructions included in the hardware
bag.

WARNING!
DISCONNECT AND SECURE TO THE “OFF” POSITION ALL ELECTRICAL POWER TO THE FAN PRIOR TO INSPECTION OR
SERVICING. FAILURE TO COMPLY WITH THIS SAFETY PRECAUTION COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.

Check all fasteners and set screws for tightness. Rotate the fan wheel by hand
to assure it turns freely and is centered between the inlets. Check pulleys and
belts for proper alignment to avoid premature belt wear, noise, vibration and
power loss. Motor and fan pulleys must be parallel and in line (Fig. 2).

The adjustable motor pulley is set at the factory for the fan RPM specified. Fan
speed can be increased by closing or decreased by opening the adjustable
motor pulley. Two groove variable pitch pulleys must be adjusted an equal WRONG WRONG CORRECT
Fig. 2
2
number of turns open. Any increase in fan speed results in an increase in horsepower required for the motor. Motor load
amperes should always be checked and compared to nameplate rating when changing fan speed.

Direction of fan wheel rotation is critical. A fan wheel rotating in the wrong
ROTATIO ROT
AT
direction will result in reduced airflow, motor overloading and possible burn- N

IO
out. Check wheel rotation by momentarily turning the fan on.

N
Rotation should be in the same direction as airflow at the outlet. See housing
and wheel examples in Fig. 3. IMPORTANT NOTE: RSF/RSFP fans should be
operated only when attached to the completed system. Without proper
static pressure loading, the motor may be overloaded and burnout may
occur.
Fig. 3 AIRFLOW

Routine Maintenance - See WARNING Page 2

To preserve the reliability and performance designed into the fan, regularly scheduled maintenance should be performed.
Items to be checked at each maintenance interval are filters, belts, bearings, fasteners, lubrication and removal of dust and
dirt.

Filters
1 inch washable aluminum mesh filters are standard on Model RSF and RSFP fans. (Optional 2 inch filters may be supplied
on some fans). Filters should be cleaned on a regular basis for optimum efficiency.

To remove the filters, first remove the fan cover by releasing the four latches. (Place the cover in an area where wind will not
blow it off the roof). The filters can be lifted out and washed in a mild detergent solution. If desired, an adhesive spray
available at most filter distributors can be applied to increase filter efficiency.

Belts
Belt tension should be checked two times during the first 24 hours of
operation and during each scheduled maintenance thereafter. Premature belt
failures are frequently caused by improper belt tension, either too tight or
loose. The proper belt tension for operating a V-belt is the lowest tension at Belt Span
which the belt will not slip at peak load conditions. For initial tensioning, belt
deflection should be 1/64 inch for each inch of belt span, determined by using
moderate thumb pressure half way between pulley centers. For example, the
belt deflection should be 1/2 inch if the belt span is 32 inches (Fig. 4).

Belt tension can be adjusted by loosening the motor plate hinge bolts and
adjusting the jack screws as required. RSF/RSFP units are supplied with Deflection =
either a painted steel motor bracket or a galvanized motor plate for larger Belt Span
motor frames. To adjust belt tension on units equipped with the painted steel 64
motor bracket, simply adjust the single jack screw. Fig. 4

For units equipped with a galvanized motor plate, both jack screws must be adjusted equally. Check pulley and belt
alignment after adjusting belt tension (Fig. 2).

Lubrication
Fan bearings on Model RSF and RSFP are permanently lubricated. Motor bearings equipped with grease fittings should be
lubricated in accordance with instructions on the motor nameplate. Motors without grease fittings are lubricated for life.

Cleaning
Motors and Fan Wheels require periodic cleaning to remove dust and dirt which may accumulate. Motor cleaning should be
limited to the exterior surface only. Removing dust and dirt from the motor housing assists in motor cooling and prolongs
motor life. Motors should never be sprayed with steam, water or solvents.
Fan wheels which are left to accumulate dust and dirt will have poor air performance, loss of efficiency and possible
damaging vibration due to an unbalanced condition.

Periodic cleaning is a good investment in preserving the reliability and performance designed into the fan.

3
 PARTS LIST

Blower Unit

Filters
*Motor Plate

Shaft Pulley
Motor

Blower Mounting Angle

Motor Pulley

Belt
Shock Mounts (4)

*Galvanized motor plate shown. Painted steel motor bracket used on units with smaller motor frame sizes.

Note: The unit serial number, located on the Greenheck name tag, should be provided when requesting parts or
information.

Warranty
Greenheck warrants this equipment to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from
the purchase date. Any units or parts which prove to be defective during the warranty period will be replaced at our
option when returned to our factory, transportation prepaid.
The motor is warranted by the motor manufacturer for a period of one year. Should the motor furnished by Greenheck
prove defective during this period, it should be returned to the nearest authorized motor service station. Greenheck
will not be responsible for any removal or installation costs.

As a result of our commitment to continuous improvement, Greenheck reserves the right to change specifications without notice.

GREENHECK
P.O. BOX 410 SCHOFIELD, WISCONSIN 54476-0410
PH. 715-359-6171
® www.greenheck.com
RSF/RSFP IOM
#453148 Rev 2 Dec 2004
Copyright © 2004 Greenheck Fan Corp.
 Serving Area: CWEE Dcs room
QTY: 4 ( 2 Working + 2 Stand by )R
Selected Model: TTK 530 - MCD 530 R

Installation
Operation
Maintenance
MCD/MWD
512-518-524-530-536-048-060
Ductable ceiling-suspended unit

SS-SVX07A-E4
 General information
Foreword
These Installation Operation and
Maintenance instructions are given
as a guide to good practice in the
installation, start-up, operation and
periodic maintenance by the user of
MCD/MWD. They do not contain the
full service procedures necessary for
the continued successful operation
of this equipment. The services of a
qualified service technician should
be employed, through the medium
of a maintenance contract with a
reputable service company.
Warranty
Warranty is based on the general
terms and conditions of the
constructor. The warranty is void if
the equipment is modified or
repaired without the written
approval of the constructor, if the
operating limits are exceeded, or if
the control system or the electrical
wiring is modified. Damage due to
misuse, lack of maintenance, or
failure to comply with the
manufacturer's instructions, is not
covered by the warranty obligation.
If the user does not conform to the
rules of chapter "Maintenance", it
may entail cancellation of warranty
and liabilities by the constructor.
About this manual
The information contained in this
manual applies to units designated
MCD/MWD. Cautions appear at
appropriate places in this instruction
manual. Your personal safety and the
proper operation of this machine
require that you follow them
carefully. The constructor assumes
no liability for installations or
servicing performed by unqualified
personnel. Read this manual
carefully and the manual on the
installation of the outdoor unit
before starting to install the system.
©American Standard Inc. 2004
About the unit
MCD/MWD units are assembled,
pressure tested, dehydrated, charged
and run tested before shipment.
MCD units are designed to operate
in cooling mode only, whereas MWD
can operate in cooling or heating
modes. This unit with its mounted
accessories is in conformity with the
provisions of the low voltage
directive 73/23/EEC and
electromagnetic compatibility
directive 89/336/EEC as amended,
and in conformity with nation
implementing legislation.
Reception
On arrival, inspect the unit before
signing the delivery note. Specify
any damage on the delivery note,
and send a registered letter of
protest to the last carrier of the
goods within 72 hours of delivery.
Notify the local sales office at the
same time. The unit should be totally
inspected within 7 days of delivery.
If any concealed damage is
discovered, send a registered letter
of protest to the carrier within 7 days
of delivery and notify the local sales
office. Units are shipped with the
refrigerant operating or holding
charge and should be examined with
an electronic leak detector to
determine the hermetic integrity of
the unit. The refrigerant charge is not
included in the standard Warranty
Cover.
Refrigerant
The refrigerant provided by the
constructor meets all the
requirements of our units. When
using recycled or reprocessed
refrigerant, it is advisable to ensure
its quality is equivalent to that of a
new refrigerant. For this, it is
necessary to have a precise analysis
made by a specialized laboratory. If
this condition is not respected, the
constructor warranty could be
cancelled. Do not release refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Contents

General information
Foreword 2
Warranty 2
General information 2
Reception 2
Refrigerant 2

Installation
Before starting 4
General data 5
Operating limits 13
Power and control wiring 14
Choice of installation position 15
Refrigerant connections 16
Condensate connections 18
Electrical connections 18
Connecting the ducts 19
Filtering 19
Installing the wired controller 19

Operation
Creating a vacuum 20
Additional refrigerant charge 20
Fan speed 21
Configuration and operation 21
Before start-up by a qualified technician 21
Unit display and emergency switch operation 21
Wired controller operation 21
Wireless controller operation 21

Maintenance
Periodic maintenance 23
Troubleshooting 24
Controller troubleshooting 26
Safety recommendations 28
Maintenance contract 28
Training 28

SS-SVX07A-E4 3
 Installation

Before starting Table 1 - Recommended sections of

electric wires (power link)
Creation of refrigerant lines
To create the refrigerant lines you Unit size Section Maximum fuse size
512 2.5 mm² 16 aM
will need refrigeration quality 518 - 524 2.5 mm² 32 aM
annealed copper tubing. These tubes 530 - 536 RB/SB 4.0 mm² 40 aM
are available on the local market 530 - 536 RB/SB 2.5 mm² 32 aM
048 - 060 2.5 mm² 32 aM
together with the insulation and
mounting equipment. These units Figure 1 - Unit description
must be connected using screw
connections/flare type for unit sizes 2

512 to 536 and brazed connections 1

for unit sizes 048-060.

3
Electrical connections
▲
Use insulated copper wire. The
section of the core varies depending
on the length required. Refer to 5

table 1 for the recommended 4

sections. The wiring and electrical

connections must comply with 1 =
Direct expansion coil
national electricity regulations. 2 =
Fan assembly
Check that the electrical 3 =
Control panel
characteristics on the nameplate 4 =
Cooling mode expansion device
(sizes 530-060)
correspond to those of the national
5 = Refrigerant connections
grid. The electrical installation shall (screw connections/flare type for unit sizes
include a disconnect switch in 512 to 536 and brazed connections for unit
compliance with local electrical sizes 048-060)
regulations.

WARNING!
Never open the indoor or outdoor
unit without first disconnecting the
power supply. There is a risk of
electrocution.

4 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

General data
Table 2 - Cooling only R407C (1/2)
Performances TTK 512 RB TTK 518 RB TTK 524 RB TTK 530 SB TTK 530 SC
Indoor unit MCD 512 CB MCD 518 CB MCD 524 CB MCD 530 CB MCD 530 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.16 4.56 6.76 8.60 8.60
Power Input (kW) 1.27 1.88 2.87 3.41 3.41
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.4 9.6 12.8 19.8 7.7
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0 45.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Scroll Scroll
Model RE 207 VHSMT PE 31 VNEMT NE 41 VNHMT ZR 40 K3E PFJ ZR 40 K3E TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 6.0 9.0 12.2 18.7 6.6
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 28 43 71 100 46
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 1 2 2 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20) 508(20))
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.229 0.229
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.5 2.5

Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 5
 Installation

Table 2 - Cooling only R407C (2/2)

Performances TTK 536 SB TTK 536 SC TTK 048 SC TTK 060 SC
Indoor unit MCD 536 CB MCD 536 CB MCD 048 CB MCD 060 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.42 9.42 13.14 14.90
Power Input (kW) 4.35 4.35 5.25 6.37
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 24.6 11.1 11.3 12.7
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 52.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Model ZR 48 K3E PFJ ZR 48 K3E TFD ZR 61 KCE TFD ZR 72 KCE TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 23.5 10.0 10.0 11.4
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 114 50 65.5 74
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.229 0.229 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Braze Braze
Suction line (inches) 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.5 2.5 3.8 4.2

Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

6 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 3 - Cooling only R22 (1/2)

Performances TTK 512 RB TTK 518 RB TTK 524 KB TTK 530 KB
Indoor unit MCD 512 DB MCD 518 DB MCD 524 DB MCD 530 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.30 5.00 6.40 8.30
Power Input (kW) 1.51 1.62 2.70 3.30
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.0 8.0 11.3 19.1
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Reciprocating
Model RH207 VHAT PH31 VNET CK32K3-PFZ CR37KQ-PFT
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 5.5 7.0 11.0 18.5
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 31 43 75 85.5
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 10.52 11.52 12.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.23
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.2 1.9 2.5 3.6
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 7
 Installation

Table 3 - Cooling only R22 (2/2)

Performances TTK 536 KB TTK 048 KC TTK 060 KC
Indoor unit MCD 536 DB MCD 048 DB MCD 060 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.90 13.50 15.80
Power Input (kW) 4.20 5.10 5.90
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 21.9 9.0 10.6
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1
Type Reciprocating Reciprocating Reciprocating
Model CR47KQ-PFZ CRPQ-0450-TFD CRNQ-0500-TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 21.0 8.0 10.0
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 105 55 65
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - 27 27
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 13.52 14.52 15.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.23 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice TXV TXV
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 3.8 3.5 4.5
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

8 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 4 - Heat pump R407C (1/2)

Performances TWK 512 RB TWK 518 RB TWK 524 RB TWK 530 SB TWK 530 SC
Indoor unit MWD 512 CB MWD 518 CB MWD 524 CB MWD 530 CB MWD 530 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 2.97 4.28 6.08 7.95 7.95
Cooling mode power input (kW) 1.46 1.54 2.60 3.26 3.26
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 3.40 4.61 6.78 8.82 8.82
Heating mode power input (kW) 1.16 1.30 2.13 2.83 2.83
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.4 9.6 12.8 19.8 7.7
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0 45.5
Recommended Fuse size(AM) type gG 16 20 20 25 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (3) (m) 50 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Scroll Scroll
Model RE 207 VHSMT PE 31 VNEMT NE 41 VNHMT ZR 40 K3E PFJ ZR 40 K3E TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 6.0 9.0 12.2 18.7 6.6
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 28.0 43.0 71.0 100.0 46.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 610 762 762
Length (mm) 420 755 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.521 0.650 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 2 3 3
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Airflow (4) (5) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Motor (5) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.229 0.229
Rated Amps (5) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (5) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 390 380 380
Height (mm) 577 580 695 790 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 1030 1100 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 1030 1003 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 420 365 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 366 365 365
Height (mm) 517 567 623 790 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.0 1.7 2.3 2.4 2.4
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 9
 Installation

Table 4 - Heat pump R407C (2/2)

Performances TWK 536 SB TWK 536 SC TWK 048 SC TWK 060 SC
Indoor unit MWD 536 CB MWD 536 CB MWD 048 CB MWD 060 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.05 9.05 11.00 12.40
Cooling mode power input (kW) 3.99 3.99 4.86 5.73
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 11.20 11.20 13.70 15.30
Heating mode power input (kW) 3.56 3.56 4.38 4.91
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.24.6 11.1 11.3 12.7
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 52.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (3) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Model ZR 48 K3E PFJ ZR 48 K3E TFD ZR 61 KCE TFD ZR 72 KCE TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 23.5 10.0 10.0 11.4
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 114.0 50.0 65.5 74.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 2 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (4) (5) (m3/h) 3400 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 1 2 2
Motor (5) (kW) 0.229 0.229 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (5) (A) 1.05 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (5) (A) 2.04 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Braze Braze
Suction line (inches) 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.6 2.6 3.3 3.75
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

10 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 5 - Heat pump R22 (1/2)

Performances TWK 512 RB TWK 518 RB TWK 524 KB TWK 530 KB
Indoor unit MWD 512 DB MWD 518 DB MWD 524 DB MWD 530 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.30 5.00 6.40 8.30
Cooling mode power input (kW) 1.51 1.62 2.70 3.30
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 3.50 5.90 7.50 9.30
Heating mode power input (kW) 1.20 1.35 2.21 2.92
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.0 8.0 11.3 19.1
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Reciprocating
Model RH207 VHAT PH31 VNET CK32K3-PFZ CR37KQ-PFT
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 5.5 7.0 11.0 18.5
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 31.0 43.0 75.0 85.5
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 10.52 11.52 12.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.23
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.7 1 1 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.4
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 11
 Installation

Table 5 - Heat pump R22 (2/2)

Performances TWK 536 KB TWK 048 KC TWK 060 KC
Indoor unit MWD 536 DB MWD 048 DB MWD 060 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.90 13.50 15.80
Cooling mode power input (kW) 4.2 5.10 5.90
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 11.10 15.10 17.70
Heating mode power input (kW) 3.66 4.45 5.20
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 21.9 9.0 10.6
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1
Type Reciprocating Reciprocating Reciprocating
Model CR47KQ-PFZ CRPQ-0450-TFD CRNQ-0500-TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 21.0 8.0 10.0
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 105.0 55.0 65.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - 27 27
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 13.52 14.52 15.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.23 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2 2
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice TXV TXV
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.6 3.5 4.5
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

12 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Dimensions
Figure 2 - Unit dimensions

Table 6 - Unit dimensions (inch/mm)

A B C D E F G H
MCD/MWD 512 23 (578) 12 (305) 38.5 (980) 31.6 ( 803) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 518 23 (578) 12 (305) 38.5 ( 980) 31.6 ( 803) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 524 23 (578) 12 (305) 42.9 ( 1090) 36.1 (920) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 530 23 (578) 12 (305) 48.3 ( 1228) 42.1 (1069) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 536 23 (578) 12 (305) 48.3 ( 1228) 42.1 (1069) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 048 27.7 (703) 15.4 ( 395) 43 ( 1091) 36 (920) 13.3 (337) 4.2 (110) 12.2 (310) 8.1 (205)
MCD/MWD 060 27.7 (703) 15.4 ( 395) 49 ( 1245) 42.1 (1070) 13.3 (337) 4.2 (110) 12.2 (310) 8.1 (205)

SS-SVX07A-E4 13
 Installation

Power and control wiring

Table 7 - Control interconnection
Outdoor unit Number of wires x section area (mm²)
Including ground wire
TTK 512 3 x 2.5
TTK 518 2 x 1.5
TTK 524 2 x 1.5
TTK 530 2 x 1.5
TTK 536 2 x 1.5
TTK 048 2 x 1.5
TTK 060 2 x 1.5
TWK 512 5 x 1.5
TWK 518 5 x 1.5
TWK 524 5 x 1.5
TWK 530 6 x 1.5
TWK 536 6 x 1.5
TWK 048 6 x 1.5
TWK 060 6 x 1.5

Table 8 - Power supply outdoor unit (1)

Number of wires x section area (mm²)
Including ground wire
TTK/TWK 512 -
TTK/TWK 518 3 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 524 3 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 530 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 536 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 048 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 060 4 x 2.5
(1) Indoor and outdoor units are powered separately
(2) Number of wires and section area are given for a
maximum wire length of 50m. If the wire is longer
than 50m, these must be recalculated.

Table 9 - Power supply indoor unit (1)

Without electric heater With electric heater
Number of wires x section area (mm²) Number of wires x section area (mm²)
MCD/MWD 512 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 / 3 x 4
MCD/MWD 518 3 x 1.5 3x4
MCD/MWD 524 3 x 1.5 3x4
MCD/MWD 530 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 536 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 048 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 060 3 x 1.5 4x4
(1) Indoor and outdoor units are powered separately
(2) Number of wires and section area are given for a
maximum wire length of 50m. If the wire is longer
than 50m, these must be recalculated.

14 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Choice of installation Preparing the ceiling and installing

position
To ensure correct installation, the
following points must be
considered.
- The ceiling must be strong enough
to support the weight of the unit.
- Choose a place where it will be
easy to comply with the
recommended clearances, taking
into account the additional space
required due to external
accessories.
- Take into consideration the drilling
of the holes in the walls to connect
the unit.
- Make sure the maximum distances
between the two units are not
exceeded. See Figure 3 and
Table 10.
Figure 3- Recommended clearances and
maximum lengths used between two
units
the unit
Drill holes in the ceiling to fix the
threaded rods according to the
dimensions given the Dimensions
section. The angle brackets can also
be used to space the drill holes.
Access is necessary on the
refrigerant connection side to
facilitate installation, maintenance
and access to the cabinet.
Four 8 mm diameter threaded rods
must be securely fixed into the
ceiling. Introduce the other end of
the rods through the slots of the unit
suspension brackets. Position the
shock absorbers, add washers and
screw the nuts down until the unit is
correctly supported. The unit must
be perfectly level in both directions
to ensure correct evacuation of the
condensates. If there is enough
space, a rubber or neoprene sheet
can be placed between the ceiling
and the unit.

Table 10 - Recommended piping R407C/R22

D3 D2 D1 Line diameter (inches)
Outdoor unit Indoor unit (m) (m) (m) Gas Liquid
TTK/TWK 512 MCD/MWD 512 20 12 15 1/2 1/4
TTK/TWK 518 MCD/MWD 518 24 18 24 5/8 3/8
TTK/TWK 524 MCD/MWD 524 24 18 24 5/8 3/8
12 12 12 5/8
TTK/TWK 530 MCD/MWD 530 3/8
40 18 24 7/8
18 18 3/4
TTK/TWK 536 MCD/MWD 536 18 3/8
40 24 7/8
24 7/8
TTK/TWK 048 MCD/MWD 048 18 24 3/8
40 1 1/8
18 12 18 7/8 3/8
TTK/TWK 060 MCD/MWD 060
40 18 24 1 1/8 1/2

SS-SVX07A-E4 15

Refrigerant connections
It is possible to remove the electrical
cabinet to facilitate access to the
refrigerant connection.
Installation procedure
- Make sure the route taken by your
refrigerant lines is as short as
possible.
- Limit pressure losses in the lines
which may be caused by crushing
of the lines, a large number of
bends or bending radii that are too
small.
- Slope all the gas lines leaving the
indoor unit so that oil can return to
the compressor by gravity.
· Prevent any possibility of oil
trapped in the gas lines.
16
Installation
CAUTION!
An insufficiently lubricated
compressor may break down.
If the vertical difference in level
between the units is greater than
2.5 m, an oil trap must be positioned
at the bottom of the vertical line, and
an additional trap must be
positioned every 7.5 m of vertical
elevation to allow oil return to the
compressor. There are no special
technical recommendations for
liquid lines because of the well-
balanced mixture of refrigerant and
oil. Movement of the liquid
refrigerant also causes the oil to
move.
Figure 4 - Protective sleeve
A = Cable bundle
1 = Wall
2 = Inside
3 = Outside
Passage of the tube and cable
bundle
Before drilling into the wall
- make sure there are no pipes or
electrical cables in the wall at the
place where you are going to drill
provide a protective sleeve for the
bundle of tubes and cables at the
point where it passes through the
hole (Figure 4). If permitted by
legislation, the condensate
drainage line can also be included
in the bundle. Wrap tape around
all the lines and cables from the
bottom of the outside unit to the
point where the piping enters the
wall. Carry out the same operation
for each circuit.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Screw/flare connections
CAUTION!
When cutting, deburring and
splaying the tubes, keep the end of
the tube down to make sure that
copper waste does not fall into the
lines.
Cut the copper tube using a pipe-
cutter only (do not use a metalsaw).
Hold the tube downwards when
deburring it.
Figure 5 - Deburring recommendations
Unscrew the Flare nuts which are
placed on the beginnings of the
indoor unit lines. Put the Flare nut
onto the tube. Splay the tube.
Connect the refrigerant tubes to the
indoor unit. Tighten the Flare nuts
using the recommended tightening
torques in Table 11. Insufficient
tightening will cause refrigerant
leaks. Use flat wrenches only (see
Figure 6). Repeat the operation for
each circuit.
Figure 6 - Tightening flare nuts
Table 11 -Recommended tightening
torques
Line diameter Tightening torque (kg/cm)
1/4'' 150-200
3/8'' 350-400
1/2'' 500-550
5/8'' 600-650
3/4'' 700-750
Brazed connections
These lines will be created on the
installation site. They will be
installed according to normal trade
practice by qualified personnel, in
compliance with local legislation.
1. Remove the plugs from the units'
refrigerant connections just before
connecting the piping, when all
the connections on the refrigerant
lines have been terminated. This
will prevent contamination by
humidity. Remove the rubber
plugs from the ends of the tubes.
2. Use a clean dry copper tube for
refrigeration installations.
3. Use silver brazing alloy only. Do
not overheat the welds and carry
out nitrogen scavenging inside the
tubes to prevent oxidization during
brazing.
4. Once all the other connections
have been made, debraze or cut
the plug on the outdoor unit's
refrigerant line connections.
Proceed in the same way as for
brazing of the indoor unit's lines.
Line insulation
To prevent heat losses and
condensation, both liquid and gas
lines must be thoroughly insulated.

SS-SVX07A-E4 17
 Installation
Condensate connections
The unit must be perfectly level in
both directions. Connect the indoor
unit's condensate tray to a
condensate drainage line. The unit is
equipped with a 20 mm diameter
smooth tube connection. To ensure
correct condensate flow, the
drainage tube must be given a
10° slope. There must not be a
condensate trap at any point in the
line. However, a trap can be
provided to prevent outside air from
being taken in by the indoor unit. If
the tube enters a room, insulate it to
prevent condensation damage.
Figure 7 - Condensate drainage
connections
18
Electrical connections
All the wiring and earthing
arrangements must comply with
local legislation.
WARNING!
Never open the indoor or outdoor
unit without first disconnecting the
power supply. There is a risk of
electrocution.
CAUTION!
1. Check the electrical characteristics
on the unit's nameplate. Make
sure the wiring complies with the
manufacturer's electrical diagram
and local legislation.
2. Connect the units using one or
more lines protected by an
electrical disconnect device.
3. Ground each unit.
4. The cables must not touch the
refrigerant lines, the motors or
other moving parts and metal
edges.
5. The manufacturer does not
assume any liability for problems
caused by modifications made to
the unit's internal wiring.
6. Tighten the terminals securely.
7. For the electrical connections,
refer to the interconnection
diagrams attached with the
machine.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Connecting the ducts Filtering

Units can be equipped with Filtering the air is necessary to
rectangular discharge and/or intake ensure the unit's correct operation.
from the bottom or intake from the The unit is supplied with a filter.
back ducts.

WARNING!
The pressure loss in the network and
the accessories must not exceed the
unit's available static pressure given
in the selection data. The design and
installation shall be done by a
qualified technician and according to
local regulations.
Figure 8 - Discharge and intake duct
possibilities
Installing the wired
controller
Location
- Do not install thermostats near or
above a source of heat (i.e. direct
sunlight, hot lamps or radiator).
- Do not expose the controller to the
indoor unit discharge air stream.
- Do not place in a confined space.

Wiring
Electrical interconnection between
units must be in accordance with
national, state and local codes.
Units must be grounded. Refer to
the wiring diagrams that are shipped
with the unit.

A = Discharge
B = Intake from the bottom
C = Intake from the back
Table 12 - Duct connection dimensions
Unit size Length (mm) Height (mm)
512/518 748 198
524/530/536 948 248
048/060 1148 298

SS-SVX07A-E4 19
 Operation

Creating a vacuum Additional refrigerant R22 Refrigerant

For this operation, use a pump While the unit is operating, charge
charge the unit with gas through the service
capable of creating a vacuum of Once the system has been vacuum
1 mm Hg (1.3mbar) or less. To create Schraeder valve located at the
pumped and is in operation and if compressor suction. R22 refrigerant
the vacuum you must connect the the distance between the units is
pump to the Schrader pressure can also be added in liquid phase in
greater than 6m, it may be the liquid line: see method used for
connection on service valve necessary to add an additional
A located on the outdoor unit (gas R407C. Never add liquid in the
charge. Table 13 indicates the suction line of the compressor.
line). To use the vacuum pump, amounts of refrigerant to add per
follow the pump manufacturer's additional meter of line. Once the
instructions. Create a vacuum up to R407C Refrigerant
appropriate amount of refrigerant WARNING! add only R407C
2 mm Hg (2.6mbar) or less. Once the has been added, fully open liquid
value of 2mm Hg or less has been refrigerant in liquid state. Never add
line valve and check the operating liquid in the suction line of the
reached, an increase in pressure will pressure.
be observed after a certain time. The compressor period. Use service
maximum permissible increase is Figure 10 - Adding refrigerant charge Schraeder valve located on the liquid
1 mm Hg after 15 minutes. If the line to charge the unit. While the unit
increase is greater and remains at a is operating, close partially the
A service valve in order to create a
constant value, this means there is
too much humidity in the system. lower pressure downstream the
In this case, break the vacuum using service valve. Add the refrigerant
dry nitrogen and start the vacuum necessary. Control the added weight
creation procedure again. with a scale.
A continuous increase in pressure Table 13 - Additional refrigerant charge
means there is a leak in the system.
Liquid line Gas line Additional
R22/R407C charge (g)
WARNING! 1 = Outdoor unit 1/4'' 1/2'' 26
Valves A and B must not be opened 2 = Gas line 5/16" 5/8" 36
before the installation of the 3 = Indoor units 3/8'' 5/8'' 60
refrigerant circuit has been 4 = Liquid line 3/8'' 3/4'' 60
5 = For sizes 512 to 524 3/8'' 7/8'' 63
completely finished, or the 6 = For sizes 530 to 060 3/8'' 1 1/8'' 68
refrigerant charge will be lost.
Figure 9 - Refrigerant circuit

1 = Outdoor unit
2 = Vacuum pump
3 = Indoor unit
4 = Gas line
5 = Liquid line
6 = TTK/TWK cooling mode

20 SS-SVX07A-E4

Fan speed
Refer to the selection data to select
the static pressure according to the
flow rate. From this it is possible to
deduce a fan rotation speed. Once
you have chosen the speed, refer to
the interconnection diagram to
connect the room thermostat to the
unit electric cabinet in order to
power the correct selected speed.
Configuration and
operation
The unit is equipped with a control
board that manages operation of the
split system. It is fitted with 4
switches, SW1-1 to SW1-4.
Before start-up by a
qualified technician
Once the system has been installed,
it is recommend to carry out the
following checks.
1. Make sure no tools or debris
have been left inside, around or
on top of the unit.
2. Unit is perfectly level in both
directions.
3. Check the electrical connections
have been correctly done. Check
the electric power supply
corresponds to the units'
nameplates.
4. Make sure the disconnect
switches have been disengaged.
5. Check the refrigerant lines are
fixed securely.
6. Check if the condensate drain
pan is correctly installed.
7. Check the piping connections
and the water-tightness of the
connectors using an appropriate
leak detection method. Check
the connections on the site have
been tightened.
8. Make sure the gas piping and
the condensate drainage tube
are insulated properly to prevent
problems with trickling of
condensation water.
SS-SVX07A-E4
Operation
9. Check the fan turns freely. Wired controller operation
10. Make sure the intake and
Figure 12 - Wired controller
discharge ducts are not blocked.
11. Check the filters are correctly
positioned. Show the user how AUTO HEAT
to change the filters. HIGH
MED COOL
12. Power up the system and LOW
observe operation carefully:
make any necessary POWER FAN
adjustments. TEMP+ TEMP-
13. Explain to the user how to
operate the unit.
Unit display and 1 = Press to turn on or off the unit, passing
through the different modes: OFF à COOL à
emergency switch HEAT.
operation 2 = Press TEMP + to increase the setting
temperature. Press TEMP - to decrease the
Four lamps on the unit display show setting temperature. The setting
operating status. In case of loss of temperature will blink for 4 seconds, then
the remote control unit, the system the current room temperature will display.
can be operated temporarily by the 3 = Press to select the required fan speed. The
emergency switch. The emergency speed will be shown by LED indicators:
switch changes the system mode of AUTO ➠ HIGH ➠ MEDIUM ➠ LOW ➠
operation by cycling through the
following modes:
➠ FAN ➠ COOL ➠ HEAT ➠ AUTO ➠
OFF ➠.
COOL, HEAT and AUTO operation
are at fixed setting of 24°C. Fan
speed is controlled by the AUTO
mode. FAN only operation is at
HIGH fan speed.
Figure 11 - Unit display
1 = Remote control receiver - this picks up the
infrared signals from the wireless controller
2 = Fan lamp- lit when the fan is operating
3 = Cooling lamp - lit when the unit is
operating in COOL mode (or COMP ON in
AUTO mode)
4 = Heating lamp - lit when the unit is
operating in HEAT mode (or heater ON in
the HEAT mode of AUTO mode)
5 = Timer lamp - lit when the system is being
controlled by the timer
6 = Emergency switch
21
 Operation

Wireless controller Auto (optional) Clock

The unit can be put into 5 different To set the clock:
operation modes (FAN, COOL, DRY, HEAT and - Press the clock setting button
To use the wireless controller, point AUTO). The cycling will be: (Figure 13, 18). The time display
the transmitter head directly towards ➠ FAN ➠ COOL ➠ DRY ➠ HEAT ➠ will blink.
the unit receiver to emit infrared HEAT ➠ AUTO ➠ - Press the HOUR button to set the
signals. When the system is in AUTO mode, hour. (Figure 13, 20)
Figure 13 - Wireless controller the display on the remote controller - Press the MIN button to set the
will show COOL and HEAT modes at minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
the same time. - Press the clock setting button
again. The time display will stop
Louver (optional) blinking.
FAN 10:14
To change the angle of the louver: if
COOL
DRY 18:40 START the button is pressed and released, Auto start
HEAT 6:30 STOP
AUTO the angle of the louver is changed The unit can be programmed to start
HIGH
MED
one step at a time. If the button is automatically. To program:
LOW
pressed and held, the angle of the - Press the START button. (Figure
louver is changed until the button is 13, 8) The time display will blink.
released. - Press the HOUR button to set the
hour. (Figure 13, 20)
SLEEP MODE
TEMP Sleep mode - Press the MIN button to set the
SWEEP LOUVER
For COOL mode, the setting minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
START STOP
temperature will be automatically - Press the START button again. The
raised 1°C after 1 hour. For HEAT time display will stop blinking.
SEND HOUR MIN
mode, the setting temperature will
be automatically lowered 1°C after 1 Auto stop
hour. The unit can be programmed to stop
When the system is in SLEEP mode, automatically. To program:
pressing the SLEEP button will - Press the STOP button. (Figure 13,
cancel the SLEEP function. When 17) The time display will blink.
1. Operating mode
2. Fan speed the system is in SLEEP mode, - Press the HOUR button to set the
3. Fan button pressing the TEMP button will raise hour. (Figure 13, 20)
4. Sleep button the setting temperature 1°C from the - Press the MIN button to set the
5. Mode button last setting. minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
6. Sweep button - to turn on/off the sweep
When the system is in SLEEP mode - Press the STOP button again. The
motor
7. Louver button and the unit is stopped by a power time display will stop blinking.
8. Timer (start) button failure or is turned off, the SLEEP
9. Send button - to transmit all parameters function will be canceled.
shown on the LCD to the main control
board
10. Clock
11. Timer (start/stop)
12. Transmit mode (lit when remote is being
used)
13. Sleep mode
14. Temperature (range: 16-30°C)
15. Power button
16. Temperature setting button
17. Stop button
18. Clock setting button
19. Minute setting button
20. Hour setting button

22 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Maintenance

WARNING! Handling the filter

Disconnect the unit's power supply
before servicing the unit. When
servicing the units, make sure that
the air passages through the coils
(both internal and external) are
clean, and free of dirt and debris.
1. To remove the filter, slightly push
the 4 clips down.
2. Remove the filter.
3. To put the filter back, just clip the
filter back into place

Periodic maintenance
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these instructions
may cause damage to the unit. The
frequency of servicing will depend
on the conditions for use of the unit,
and will be determined by regular
inspections.
1. Check the condensate piping is
not blocked.
2. Turn the fan blades manually and
make sure they are not damaged.
Clean them if necessary and
verify their alignment.
3. Motor - check the wiring, and
ensure the commutators are
operating correctly. Replace any
damaged components.
4. Disconnection of power and
electrical components - check for
correct operation.
5. Refrigerant circuit - use an
appropriate leak detection method
to check for leaks.
6. Tighten all the screws and bolts.
7. Make sure that the air passages
through the coils (both internal
and external) are clean, and free
of dirt and debris.
8. Clean the filter by beating it and
applying suction in the opposite
direction to the airflow.

SS-SVX07A-E4 23
 Maintenance

Table 14 - Troubleshooting

Symptoms Possible causes Checks Corrective action

1. Loose electrical connections. 1. Tighten the connections if necessary.

A. Compressor or fan is not operating.
2. Check the fuses and wiring. 2. Replace the fuses if necessary.

1. If the check shows the motor windings

1. Check the compressor's wiring and
are broken or earthed, replace the
No cooling or B. The fan is operating but the compressor winding resistors.
compressor.
heating does not start.
2. Check the capacitor 2. Replace if necessary.

C. The compressor is operating but the fan
does not start.
D. Control switch is defective, incorrectly
wired or adjusted.
1. Check the fan motor, the capacitor or
1. Repair or replace
the wiring.
1. Check the control switch connections
1. Change the setting. Replace if defective.
and the temperature setting.

A. Lack of refrigerant fluid. 1. Check there are no leaks. 1. Drain, repair and recharge.

1. Check the air filter. 1. Clean and replace.

2. Check the fin assemblies are clean. 2. Clean if obstructed.

Insufficient heating
B. Insufficient air volume.
or cooling 3. If the fan is loose on its shaft, tighten the
3. Check the fan.
fixing bolts.

4. Check the wiring and capacitors. 4. Repair or replace

1. Check there is no humidity in the

C. Obstructed capillaries or blocked orifice. 1. Drain and recharge.
system.

24 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Maintenance

Symptoms Possible causes Checks Corrective action

A. Control switch no longer responds to the 1. Check operation and connections of

1. Replace the control switch if it is defective.
ambient temperature. the control switch.

The system operates B. Loss of refrigerant fluid. 1. Check there are no leaks in the system. 1. Repair and recharge.
for too long or
continuously. 1. Check the air circulation in the 1. Make sure air circulation is satisfactory.
C. Insufficient ventilation.
condenser. Move the outdoor unit if necessary.

D. Incorrectly adjusted control switch. 1. Check the set point. 1. Adjust or replace if defective.

A. Defective control switch 1. Check operation of the control switch. 1. Replace if defective.

1. Check air circulation in the indoor and

B. Insufficient air circulation. 1. Clean the coil and filter if necessary.
System operates in outdoor units.
short cycles. 1. Check if there are leaks or excess 1. Repair if there are leaks. Add or remove
C. Insufficient or excess refrigerant fluid.
pressure. refrigerant fluid.

D. Incorrect electric power supply. 1. Check the electric power supply. 1. Find cause and stabilise the power supply.

A. Insufficient refrigerant fluid. 1. Check if there are leaks in the system. 1. Repair the leak and recharge.

1. Check the filter. 1. Clean and put back in position.

2. Clean the fins. If the filter is missing, install

2. Check the fin block.
Internal coil frozen. B. Insufficient air circulation. one.
3. Fan free on the bearing, tighten the fixing
3. Check the fan. screws - connection fault, find the cause
and repair.

C. Defective anti-frost sensor. 1. Check the sensor. 1. Replace if necessary.

1. Check installation of the compressor

1. Tighten any loose components.
and motor.
2. If the fan is rubbing against a part, re-align
2. Check the fan position.
it.
A. Defective installation.
3. Check for vibrations of piping and
3. Find the cause and repair.
crankcase.
4. Check positioning of unit concerning
Unit is noisy 4. Find the cause and repair.
noise and vibrations.

B. Motor bearings are worn. 1. Check the motor. 1. Replace the motor if necessary.

C. Noisy compressor. 1. Check if the compressor is losing oil. 1. Locate the leak, repair and add oil.

D. Excess refrigerant fluid or oil. 1. Remove the excess charge.

SS-SVX07A-E4 25
 Trouble-shooting
(electric heating only)

Table 15 - Trouble-shooting (electric heating only)

No heating. A. Incorrect control switch setting.
B. Defective control switch.
C. Defective heater temp. limit switch.
1. Check the thermostat's set points and 1. Change the settings.
operation.
1. Check operation and the signal to the 1. Repair or replace.
heating device.
1. Check the heater temp. limit switch. 1. Replace the defective switch.

D. Unit wiring is incorrect. 1. Check the wiring. 1. Modify the wiring as indicated on
the wiring diagram.
E. The heater temperature limit switch 1. Check tightness of the indoor unit's 1. Tighten the fixing screws.
has opened. fan on its shaft.
F. Dirty air filter. 1. Check the filter. 1. Clean the filter.

G. Indoor unit coil fins obstructed. 1. Check the filter is not missing. 1. Fix the filter.

H. Defective electrical component. 1. Check all the components are correct. 1. Replace the defective component.
2. Check the fin block. 2. Clean the fins.

Controller troubleshooting Dot LED after the first digit of

The controller has a built-in self- 7-segment LED, if blinking indicates
diagnostic function. The following any of the room, freeze or defrost
LEDs are used to indicate the sensor is open or short circuit.
problem or status. Dot LED after the second digit of
Auto/High/Medium/Low LEDs 7-segment LED, indicates that the
show fan speed setting. compressor is on if lit, and indicates
either the freeze or defrost
Cool LED shows the COOL operating protection is active if blinking.
mode.
Figure 14 - LEDs blinking signals
- If the cooling fail protection is
active, this LED will be blinking
with the signal as per Figure 14, A.
- If anti-overheat or low ambient
protection is active, this LED will
be blinking with the signal as per
Figure 14, B.
Heat LED shows the HEAT
operating mode.
- If the heating fail protection is On-board setting
active, this LED will be blinking There is 1 jumper location on the
with the signal as per Figure 14, A. main control board which is related
- If the compressor overload to this setting. If the jumper is put at
protection is active, this LED will OP4 location, both heat pump and
be blinking with the signal as per heater can be operated. If not, only
Figure 14, B. heat pump can be operated.
7-segment LED (2 digits) shows the
room temperature if lit, and the
setting temperature while blinking.

26 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Notes

SS-SVX07A-E4 27
Safety recommendations
To avoid accidents and damage, the
following recommendations should
be observed during maintenance
and service visits :
1. Never apply pressure higher than
7 bar for tests.
2. Disconnect the main supply
before any servicing on the unit.
3. Service work on the refrigeration
system and the electrical system
should be carried out only by
qualified and experienced
personnel.
www.trane.com
For more information, contact
your local district office or e-mail us at
comfort@trane.com
Maintenance contract Training
It is strongly recommended that you The equipment described in this
sign a maintenance contract with manual is the result of many years
your local Service Agency. This of research and continuous
contract provides regular development. To assist you in
maintenance of your installation by obtaining the best use of it, and
a specialist in our equipment. maintaining it in perfect operating
Regular maintenance ensures that condition over a long period of time,
any malfunction is detected and the constructor has at your disposal
corrected in good time and a refrigeration and air conditioning
minimizes the possibility that service school. The principal aim of
serious damage will occur. Finally, this is to give operators and
regular maintenance ensures the maintenance technicians a better
maximum operating life of your knowledge of the equipment they
equipment. We would remind you are using, or that is under their
that failure to respect these charge. Emphasis is particularly
installation and maintenance given to the importance of periodic
instructions may result in immediate checks on the unit operating
cancellation of the warranty. parameters as well as on preventive
maintenance, which reduces the cost
of owning the unit by avoiding
serious and costly breakdown.
Literature Order Number SS-SVX07A-E4
Date 0606
Supersedes SS-SVX07A-E4_0604
Stocking Location Europe
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
change design and specifications without notice.
Only qualified technicians should perform the installation and servicing of equipment referred to in
this publication..
American Standard Europe BVBA
Registered Office: 1789 Chaussée de Wavre, 1160 Brussels - Belgium.
 SIDI KRIR POWER STATION 750 MW COMBINED CYCLE PROJECT
MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT / PIPE INSTALLATION

WEST DELTA ELECTRICITY PRODUCTION COMPANY

POWER GENERATION ENGINEERING AND SERVICES COMPANY

Installation, Operation & Maintenance Manual for

Gas Compressor Electrical Equipment Bldg
# AC Units

This document is confidential and is the property of Toshiba Plant Systems & Services Corporation. It must not be copied, loaned or transferred, nor must the information it
contains be disclosed to any third party without their written permission.
 Serving Area: Gas compressor electrical room
QTY: 4 ( 2 Working + 2 Stand by )R
Selected Model: TTK 048 - MCD 048 R

Installation
Operation
Maintenance
MCD/MWD
512-518-524-530-536-048-060
Ductable ceiling-suspended unit

SS-SVX07A-E4
 General information
Foreword
These Installation Operation and
Maintenance instructions are given
as a guide to good practice in the
installation, start-up, operation and
periodic maintenance by the user of
MCD/MWD. They do not contain the
full service procedures necessary for
the continued successful operation
of this equipment. The services of a
qualified service technician should
be employed, through the medium
of a maintenance contract with a
reputable service company.
Warranty
Warranty is based on the general
terms and conditions of the
constructor. The warranty is void if
the equipment is modified or
repaired without the written
approval of the constructor, if the
operating limits are exceeded, or if
the control system or the electrical
wiring is modified. Damage due to
misuse, lack of maintenance, or
failure to comply with the
manufacturer's instructions, is not
covered by the warranty obligation.
If the user does not conform to the
rules of chapter "Maintenance", it
may entail cancellation of warranty
and liabilities by the constructor.
About this manual
The information contained in this
manual applies to units designated
MCD/MWD. Cautions appear at
appropriate places in this instruction
manual. Your personal safety and the
proper operation of this machine
require that you follow them
carefully. The constructor assumes
no liability for installations or
servicing performed by unqualified
personnel. Read this manual
carefully and the manual on the
installation of the outdoor unit
before starting to install the system.
©American Standard Inc. 2004
About the unit
MCD/MWD units are assembled,
pressure tested, dehydrated, charged
and run tested before shipment.
MCD units are designed to operate
in cooling mode only, whereas MWD
can operate in cooling or heating
modes. This unit with its mounted
accessories is in conformity with the
provisions of the low voltage
directive 73/23/EEC and
electromagnetic compatibility
directive 89/336/EEC as amended,
and in conformity with nation
implementing legislation.
Reception
On arrival, inspect the unit before
signing the delivery note. Specify
any damage on the delivery note,
and send a registered letter of
protest to the last carrier of the
goods within 72 hours of delivery.
Notify the local sales office at the
same time. The unit should be totally
inspected within 7 days of delivery.
If any concealed damage is
discovered, send a registered letter
of protest to the carrier within 7 days
of delivery and notify the local sales
office. Units are shipped with the
refrigerant operating or holding
charge and should be examined with
an electronic leak detector to
determine the hermetic integrity of
the unit. The refrigerant charge is not
included in the standard Warranty
Cover.
Refrigerant
The refrigerant provided by the
constructor meets all the
requirements of our units. When
using recycled or reprocessed
refrigerant, it is advisable to ensure
its quality is equivalent to that of a
new refrigerant. For this, it is
necessary to have a precise analysis
made by a specialized laboratory. If
this condition is not respected, the
constructor warranty could be
cancelled. Do not release refrigerant
into the atmosphere.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Contents

General information
Foreword 2
Warranty 2
General information 2
Reception 2
Refrigerant 2

Installation
Before starting 4
General data 5
Operating limits 13
Power and control wiring 14
Choice of installation position 15
Refrigerant connections 16
Condensate connections 18
Electrical connections 18
Connecting the ducts 19
Filtering 19
Installing the wired controller 19

Operation
Creating a vacuum 20
Additional refrigerant charge 20
Fan speed 21
Configuration and operation 21
Before start-up by a qualified technician 21
Unit display and emergency switch operation 21
Wired controller operation 21
Wireless controller operation 21

Maintenance
Periodic maintenance 23
Troubleshooting 24
Controller troubleshooting 26
Safety recommendations 28
Maintenance contract 28
Training 28

SS-SVX07A-E4 3
 Installation

Before starting Table 1 - Recommended sections of

electric wires (power link)
Creation of refrigerant lines
To create the refrigerant lines you Unit size Section Maximum fuse size
512 2.5 mm² 16 aM
will need refrigeration quality 518 - 524 2.5 mm² 32 aM
annealed copper tubing. These tubes 530 - 536 RB/SB 4.0 mm² 40 aM
are available on the local market 530 - 536 RB/SB 2.5 mm² 32 aM
048 - 060 2.5 mm² 32 aM
together with the insulation and
mounting equipment. These units Figure 1 - Unit description
must be connected using screw
connections/flare type for unit sizes 2

512 to 536 and brazed connections 1

for unit sizes 048-060.

3
Electrical connections
▲
Use insulated copper wire. The
section of the core varies depending
on the length required. Refer to 5

table 1 for the recommended 4

sections. The wiring and electrical

connections must comply with 1 =
Direct expansion coil
national electricity regulations. 2 =
Fan assembly
Check that the electrical 3 =
Control panel
characteristics on the nameplate 4 =
Cooling mode expansion device
(sizes 530-060)
correspond to those of the national
5 = Refrigerant connections
grid. The electrical installation shall (screw connections/flare type for unit sizes
include a disconnect switch in 512 to 536 and brazed connections for unit
compliance with local electrical sizes 048-060)
regulations.

WARNING!
Never open the indoor or outdoor
unit without first disconnecting the
power supply. There is a risk of
electrocution.

4 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

General data
Table 2 - Cooling only R407C (1/2)
Performances TTK 512 RB TTK 518 RB TTK 524 RB TTK 530 SB TTK 530 SC
Indoor unit MCD 512 CB MCD 518 CB MCD 524 CB MCD 530 CB MCD 530 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.16 4.56 6.76 8.60 8.60
Power Input (kW) 1.27 1.88 2.87 3.41 3.41
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.4 9.6 12.8 19.8 7.7
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0 45.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Scroll Scroll
Model RE 207 VHSMT PE 31 VNEMT NE 41 VNHMT ZR 40 K3E PFJ ZR 40 K3E TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 6.0 9.0 12.2 18.7 6.6
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 28 43 71 100 46
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 1 2 2 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20) 508(20))
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.229 0.229
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.1 1.6 2.2 2.5 2.5

Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 5
 Installation

Table 2 - Cooling only R407C (2/2)

Performances TTK 536 SB TTK 536 SC TTK 048 SC TTK 060 SC
Indoor unit MCD 536 CB MCD 536 CB MCD 048 CB MCD 060 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.42 9.42 13.14 14.90
Power Input (kW) 4.35 4.35 5.25 6.37
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 24.6 11.1 11.3 12.7
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 52.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Model ZR 48 K3E PFJ ZR 48 K3E TFD ZR 61 KCE TFD ZR 72 KCE TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 23.5 10.0 10.0 11.4
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 114 50 65.5 74
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.229 0.229 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Braze Braze
Suction line (inches) 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.5 2.5 3.8 4.2

Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

6 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 3 - Cooling only R22 (1/2)

Performances TTK 512 RB TTK 518 RB TTK 524 KB TTK 530 KB
Indoor unit MCD 512 DB MCD 518 DB MCD 524 DB MCD 530 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.30 5.00 6.40 8.30
Power Input (kW) 1.51 1.62 2.70 3.30
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.0 8.0 11.3 19.1
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Reciprocating
Model RH207 VHAT PH31 VNET CK32K3-PFZ CR37KQ-PFT
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 5.5 7.0 11.0 18.5
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 31 43 75 85.5
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 10.52 11.52 12.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.23
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.2 1.9 2.5 3.6
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 7
 Installation

Table 3 - Cooling only R22 (2/2)

Performances TTK 536 KB TTK 048 KC TTK 060 KC
Indoor unit MCD 536 DB MCD 048 DB MCD 060 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.90 13.50 15.80
Power Input (kW) 4.20 5.10 5.90
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 21.9 9.0 10.6
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1
Type Reciprocating Reciprocating Reciprocating
Model CR47KQ-PFZ CRPQ-0450-TFD CRNQ-0500-TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 21.0 8.0 10.0
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 105 55 65
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - 27 27
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 13.52 14.52 15.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.23 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice TXV TXV
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 3.8 3.5 4.5
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(3) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(4) for fan system

8 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 4 - Heat pump R407C (1/2)

Performances TWK 512 RB TWK 518 RB TWK 524 RB TWK 530 SB TWK 530 SC
Indoor unit MWD 512 CB MWD 518 CB MWD 524 CB MWD 530 CB MWD 530 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 2.97 4.28 6.08 7.95 7.95
Cooling mode power input (kW) 1.46 1.54 2.60 3.26 3.26
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 3.40 4.61 6.78 8.82 8.82
Heating mode power input (kW) 1.16 1.30 2.13 2.83 2.83
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.4 9.6 12.8 19.8 7.7
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0 45.5
Recommended Fuse size(AM) type gG 16 20 20 25 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (3) (m) 50 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Scroll Scroll
Model RE 207 VHSMT PE 31 VNEMT NE 41 VNHMT ZR 40 K3E PFJ ZR 40 K3E TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 6.0 9.0 12.2 18.7 6.6
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 28.0 43.0 71.0 100.0 46.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 610 762 762
Length (mm) 420 755 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.521 0.650 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 2 3 3
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1 1
Airflow (4) (5) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1 1
Motor (5) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.229 0.229
Rated Amps (5) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (5) (A) 0.70 1.00 1.00 2.04 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 390 380 380
Height (mm) 577 580 695 790 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 1030 1100 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 1030 1003 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 420 365 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 366 365 365
Height (mm) 517 567 623 790 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.0 1.7 2.3 2.4 2.4
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 9
 Installation

Table 4 - Heat pump R407C (2/2)

Performances TWK 536 SB TWK 536 SC TWK 048 SC TWK 060 SC
Indoor unit MWD 536 CB MWD 536 CB MWD 048 CB MWD 060 CB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.05 9.05 11.00 12.40
Cooling mode power input (kW) 3.99 3.99 4.86 5.73
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 11.20 11.20 13.70 15.30
Heating mode power input (kW) 3.56 3.56 4.38 4.91
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.24.6 11.1 11.3 12.7
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 52.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (3) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Scroll Scroll Scroll Scroll
Model ZR 48 K3E PFJ ZR 48 K3E TFD ZR 61 KCE TFD ZR 72 KCE TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 23.5 10.0 10.0 11.4
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 114.0 50.0 65.5 74.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 9.52 9.52 9.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 2 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (4) (5) (m3/h) 3400 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 1 2 2
Motor (5) (kW) 0.229 0.229 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (5) (A) 1.05 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (5) (A) 2.04 2.04 2.00 2.00
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Braze Braze
Suction line (inches) 3/4 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8 3/8
R407C Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.6 2.6 3.3 3.75
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

10 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Table 5 - Heat pump R22 (1/2)

Performances TWK 512 RB TWK 518 RB TWK 524 KB TWK 530 KB
Indoor unit MWD 512 DB MWD 518 DB MWD 524 DB MWD 530 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 3.30 5.00 6.40 8.30
Cooling mode power input (kW) 1.51 1.62 2.70 3.30
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 3.50 5.90 7.50 9.30
Heating mode power input (kW) 1.20 1.35 2.21 2.92
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 36 43 40 44
Units Amps
Current (A) 6.0 8.0 11.3 19.1
Starting Amps (A) 28.7 44.0 72.0 97.0
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 16 20 20 25
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 3 x 2.5 3x4
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1 1
Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Reciprocating
Model RH207 VHAT PH31 VNET CK32K3-PFZ CR37KQ-PFT
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 5.5 7.0 11.0 18.5
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 31.0 43.0 75.0 85.5
Motor RPM (rpm) 2850 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - - - -
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 9.52 10.52 11.52 12.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 508 559 559 762
Length (mm) 420 755 755 855
Face Area (m2) 0.213 0.420 0.420 0.650
Number of rows 2 2 2 2
Number of circuits 2 4 4 4
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 180 180 180
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 1 1 1
Diameter mm (inches) 406(16) 457(18) 457(18) 508(20)
Number of speeds 1 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1050 2020 2020 3400
Number of motors 1 1 1 1
Motor (4) (kW) 0.08 0.14 0.14 0.23
Rated Amps (4) (A) 0.35 0.60 0.60 1.05
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 0.7 1 1 2.04
Motor RPM (rpm) 930 930 930 900
Capacitor per fan (µF) 2.5 2 2 5
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 550 820 1100 1370
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 672 860 860 1045
Width (mm) 357 340 340 380
Height (mm) 577 580 580 790
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 667 821 821 1100
Length without feet (mm) 667 821 821 1003
Width with feet (mm) 332 400 400 365
Width without feet (mm) 277 327 327 365
Height (mm) 517 567 567 790
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 36 54 58 87
Weight crated (kg) 37 56 60 89
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 1/2 5/8 5/8 3/4
Liquid line (inches) 1/4 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 1.2 1.4 1.7 2.4
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

SS-SVX07A-E4 11
 Installation

Table 5 - Heat pump R22 (2/2)

Performances TWK 536 KB TWK 048 KC TWK 060 KC
Indoor unit MWD 536 DB MWD 048 DB MWD 060 DB
Cooling Capacity (1) (kW) 9.90 13.50 15.80
Cooling mode power input (kW) 4.2 5.10 5.90
Heating Capacity (2) (kW) 11.10 15.10 17.70
Heating mode power input (kW) 3.66 4.45 5.20
Main Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 400/3/50 400/3/50
Sound Power Level in high speed (dB(A)) 44 53 63
Units Amps
Current (A) 21.9 9.0 10.6
Starting Amps (A) 116.0 64.0 72.5
Recommended Fuse size (AM) type gG 40 20 20
Recommended Power Wire nb wires x mm2 3x6 4 x 2.5 4 x 2.5
Recommended Control Interconnection Wire nb wires x mm2 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5 2 x 1.5
Max wire length (2) (m) 50 50 50
Compressor
Number 1 1 1
Type Reciprocating Reciprocating Reciprocating
Model CR47KQ-PFZ CRPQ-0450-TFD CRNQ-0500-TFD
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Number of motors 1 1 1
Maximum Continuous Current (A) 21.0 8.0 10.0
Locked Rotor Amps (A) 105.0 55.0 65.0
Motor RPM (rpm) 2900 2900 2900
Crankcase Heater (W) - 27 27
Outdoor Coil
Fin Type Wavy 3B Wavy 3B Wavy 3B
Tube size (mm) 13.52 14.52 15.52
Tube Type Inner Groove Inner Groove Inner Groove
Height (mm) 762 1219 1219
Length (mm) 855 855 855
Face Area (m2) 0.650 1.048 1.048
Number of rows 2 2 2
Number of circuits 4 6 6
Fins per feet (fpf) 180 240 240
Outdoor Fan
Type Axial Axial Axial
Number 1 2 2
Diameter mm (inches) 508(20) 457(18) 457(18)
Number of speeds 1 1 1
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 3400 4600 4600
Number of motors 1 2 2
Motor (4) (kW) 0.23 0.29 0.29
Rated Amps (4) (A) 1.05 1.20 1.20
Locked rotor Amps (4) (A) 2.04 2 2
Motor RPM (rpm) 900 930 930
Capacitor per fan (µF) 5 4 4
Power supply (V/Ph/Hz) 230/1/50 230/1/50 230/1/50
Indoor Fan
Airflow (3) (4) (m3/h) 1650 2190 2300
Expansion device
Cooling mode Orifice TXV TXV
Dimensions crated
Length (mm) 1045 1045 1045
Width (mm) 380 390 390
Height (mm) 790 1389 1389
Dimensions uncrated
Length with feet (mm) 1100 1030 1030
Length without feet (mm) 1003 1030 1030
Width with feet (mm) 365 420 420
Width without feet (mm) 365 366 366
Height (mm) 790 1246 1246
Weight
Weight uncrated (kg) 89 105 108
Weight crated (kg) 91 108 111
Refrigerant Connections
Type Flare Flare Flare
Suction line (inches) 3/4 1 1/8 1 1/8
Liquid line (inches) 3/8 3/8 3/8
R22 Refrigerant Charge (kg) 2.6 3.5 4.5
Notes:
(1) at 27°C db /19°C wb indoor and 35°C outdoor
(2) at 7°C db /6°C wb outdoor and 20°C indoor
(3) Wire channel @ 35°C ambient max.
(4) at nominal airflow with standard drive
(5) for fan system

12 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Dimensions
Figure 2 - Unit dimensions

Table 6 - Unit dimensions (inch/mm)

A B C D E F G H
MCD/MWD 512 23 (578) 12 (305) 38.5 (980) 31.6 ( 803) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 518 23 (578) 12 (305) 38.5 ( 980) 31.6 ( 803) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 524 23 (578) 12 (305) 42.9 ( 1090) 36.1 (920) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 530 23 (578) 12 (305) 48.3 ( 1228) 42.1 (1069) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 536 23 (578) 12 (305) 48.3 ( 1228) 42.1 (1069) 6.7 (170) 3.3 (87) 8.3 (210) 4.3 (110)
MCD/MWD 048 27.7 (703) 15.4 ( 395) 43 ( 1091) 36 (920) 13.3 (337) 4.2 (110) 12.2 (310) 8.1 (205)
MCD/MWD 060 27.7 (703) 15.4 ( 395) 49 ( 1245) 42.1 (1070) 13.3 (337) 4.2 (110) 12.2 (310) 8.1 (205)

SS-SVX07A-E4 13
 Installation

Power and control wiring

Table 7 - Control interconnection
Outdoor unit Number of wires x section area (mm²)
Including ground wire
TTK 512 3 x 2.5
TTK 518 2 x 1.5
TTK 524 2 x 1.5
TTK 530 2 x 1.5
TTK 536 2 x 1.5
TTK 048 2 x 1.5
TTK 060 2 x 1.5
TWK 512 5 x 1.5
TWK 518 5 x 1.5
TWK 524 5 x 1.5
TWK 530 6 x 1.5
TWK 536 6 x 1.5
TWK 048 6 x 1.5
TWK 060 6 x 1.5

Table 8 - Power supply outdoor unit (1)

Number of wires x section area (mm²)
Including ground wire
TTK/TWK 512 -
TTK/TWK 518 3 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 524 3 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 530 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 536 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 048 4 x 2.5
TTK/TWK 060 4 x 2.5
(1) Indoor and outdoor units are powered separately
(2) Number of wires and section area are given for a
maximum wire length of 50m. If the wire is longer
than 50m, these must be recalculated.

Table 9 - Power supply indoor unit (1)

Without electric heater With electric heater
Number of wires x section area (mm²) Number of wires x section area (mm²)
MCD/MWD 512 3 x 1.5 3 x 2.5 / 3 x 4
MCD/MWD 518 3 x 1.5 3x4
MCD/MWD 524 3 x 1.5 3x4
MCD/MWD 530 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 536 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 048 3 x 1.5 4x4
MCD/MWD 060 3 x 1.5 4x4
(1) Indoor and outdoor units are powered separately
(2) Number of wires and section area are given for a
maximum wire length of 50m. If the wire is longer
than 50m, these must be recalculated.

14 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Choice of installation Preparing the ceiling and installing

position
To ensure correct installation, the
following points must be
considered.
- The ceiling must be strong enough
to support the weight of the unit.
- Choose a place where it will be
easy to comply with the
recommended clearances, taking
into account the additional space
required due to external
accessories.
- Take into consideration the drilling
of the holes in the walls to connect
the unit.
- Make sure the maximum distances
between the two units are not
exceeded. See Figure 3 and
Table 10.
Figure 3- Recommended clearances and
maximum lengths used between two
units
the unit
Drill holes in the ceiling to fix the
threaded rods according to the
dimensions given the Dimensions
section. The angle brackets can also
be used to space the drill holes.
Access is necessary on the
refrigerant connection side to
facilitate installation, maintenance
and access to the cabinet.
Four 8 mm diameter threaded rods
must be securely fixed into the
ceiling. Introduce the other end of
the rods through the slots of the unit
suspension brackets. Position the
shock absorbers, add washers and
screw the nuts down until the unit is
correctly supported. The unit must
be perfectly level in both directions
to ensure correct evacuation of the
condensates. If there is enough
space, a rubber or neoprene sheet
can be placed between the ceiling
and the unit.

Table 10 - Recommended piping R407C/R22

D3 D2 D1 Line diameter (inches)
Outdoor unit Indoor unit (m) (m) (m) Gas Liquid
TTK/TWK 512 MCD/MWD 512 20 12 15 1/2 1/4
TTK/TWK 518 MCD/MWD 518 24 18 24 5/8 3/8
TTK/TWK 524 MCD/MWD 524 24 18 24 5/8 3/8
12 12 12 5/8
TTK/TWK 530 MCD/MWD 530 3/8
40 18 24 7/8
18 18 3/4
TTK/TWK 536 MCD/MWD 536 18 3/8
40 24 7/8
24 7/8
TTK/TWK 048 MCD/MWD 048 18 24 3/8
40 1 1/8
18 12 18 7/8 3/8
TTK/TWK 060 MCD/MWD 060
40 18 24 1 1/8 1/2

SS-SVX07A-E4 15

Refrigerant connections
It is possible to remove the electrical
cabinet to facilitate access to the
refrigerant connection.
Installation procedure
- Make sure the route taken by your
refrigerant lines is as short as
possible.
- Limit pressure losses in the lines
which may be caused by crushing
of the lines, a large number of
bends or bending radii that are too
small.
- Slope all the gas lines leaving the
indoor unit so that oil can return to
the compressor by gravity.
· Prevent any possibility of oil
trapped in the gas lines.
16
Installation
CAUTION!
An insufficiently lubricated
compressor may break down.
If the vertical difference in level
between the units is greater than
2.5 m, an oil trap must be positioned
at the bottom of the vertical line, and
an additional trap must be
positioned every 7.5 m of vertical
elevation to allow oil return to the
compressor. There are no special
technical recommendations for
liquid lines because of the well-
balanced mixture of refrigerant and
oil. Movement of the liquid
refrigerant also causes the oil to
move.
Figure 4 - Protective sleeve
A = Cable bundle
1 = Wall
2 = Inside
3 = Outside
Passage of the tube and cable
bundle
Before drilling into the wall
- make sure there are no pipes or
electrical cables in the wall at the
place where you are going to drill
provide a protective sleeve for the
bundle of tubes and cables at the
point where it passes through the
hole (Figure 4). If permitted by
legislation, the condensate
drainage line can also be included
in the bundle. Wrap tape around
all the lines and cables from the
bottom of the outside unit to the
point where the piping enters the
wall. Carry out the same operation
for each circuit.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Screw/flare connections
CAUTION!
When cutting, deburring and
splaying the tubes, keep the end of
the tube down to make sure that
copper waste does not fall into the
lines.
Cut the copper tube using a pipe-
cutter only (do not use a metalsaw).
Hold the tube downwards when
deburring it.
Figure 5 - Deburring recommendations
Unscrew the Flare nuts which are
placed on the beginnings of the
indoor unit lines. Put the Flare nut
onto the tube. Splay the tube.
Connect the refrigerant tubes to the
indoor unit. Tighten the Flare nuts
using the recommended tightening
torques in Table 11. Insufficient
tightening will cause refrigerant
leaks. Use flat wrenches only (see
Figure 6). Repeat the operation for
each circuit.
Figure 6 - Tightening flare nuts
Table 11 -Recommended tightening
torques
Line diameter Tightening torque (kg/cm)
1/4'' 150-200
3/8'' 350-400
1/2'' 500-550
5/8'' 600-650
3/4'' 700-750
Brazed connections
These lines will be created on the
installation site. They will be
installed according to normal trade
practice by qualified personnel, in
compliance with local legislation.
1. Remove the plugs from the units'
refrigerant connections just before
connecting the piping, when all
the connections on the refrigerant
lines have been terminated. This
will prevent contamination by
humidity. Remove the rubber
plugs from the ends of the tubes.
2. Use a clean dry copper tube for
refrigeration installations.
3. Use silver brazing alloy only. Do
not overheat the welds and carry
out nitrogen scavenging inside the
tubes to prevent oxidization during
brazing.
4. Once all the other connections
have been made, debraze or cut
the plug on the outdoor unit's
refrigerant line connections.
Proceed in the same way as for
brazing of the indoor unit's lines.
Line insulation
To prevent heat losses and
condensation, both liquid and gas
lines must be thoroughly insulated.

SS-SVX07A-E4 17
 Installation
Condensate connections
The unit must be perfectly level in
both directions. Connect the indoor
unit's condensate tray to a
condensate drainage line. The unit is
equipped with a 20 mm diameter
smooth tube connection. To ensure
correct condensate flow, the
drainage tube must be given a
10° slope. There must not be a
condensate trap at any point in the
line. However, a trap can be
provided to prevent outside air from
being taken in by the indoor unit. If
the tube enters a room, insulate it to
prevent condensation damage.
Figure 7 - Condensate drainage
connections
18
Electrical connections
All the wiring and earthing
arrangements must comply with
local legislation.
WARNING!
Never open the indoor or outdoor
unit without first disconnecting the
power supply. There is a risk of
electrocution.
CAUTION!
1. Check the electrical characteristics
on the unit's nameplate. Make
sure the wiring complies with the
manufacturer's electrical diagram
and local legislation.
2. Connect the units using one or
more lines protected by an
electrical disconnect device.
3. Ground each unit.
4. The cables must not touch the
refrigerant lines, the motors or
other moving parts and metal
edges.
5. The manufacturer does not
assume any liability for problems
caused by modifications made to
the unit's internal wiring.
6. Tighten the terminals securely.
7. For the electrical connections,
refer to the interconnection
diagrams attached with the
machine.
SS-SVX07A-E4
 Installation

Connecting the ducts Filtering

Units can be equipped with Filtering the air is necessary to
rectangular discharge and/or intake ensure the unit's correct operation.
from the bottom or intake from the The unit is supplied with a filter.
back ducts.

WARNING!
The pressure loss in the network and
the accessories must not exceed the
unit's available static pressure given
in the selection data. The design and
installation shall be done by a
qualified technician and according to
local regulations.
Figure 8 - Discharge and intake duct
possibilities
Installing the wired
controller
Location
- Do not install thermostats near or
above a source of heat (i.e. direct
sunlight, hot lamps or radiator).
- Do not expose the controller to the
indoor unit discharge air stream.
- Do not place in a confined space.

Wiring
Electrical interconnection between
units must be in accordance with
national, state and local codes.
Units must be grounded. Refer to
the wiring diagrams that are shipped
with the unit.

A = Discharge
B = Intake from the bottom
C = Intake from the back
Table 12 - Duct connection dimensions
Unit size Length (mm) Height (mm)
512/518 748 198
524/530/536 948 248
048/060 1148 298

SS-SVX07A-E4 19
 Operation

Creating a vacuum Additional refrigerant R22 Refrigerant

For this operation, use a pump While the unit is operating, charge
charge the unit with gas through the service
capable of creating a vacuum of Once the system has been vacuum
1 mm Hg (1.3mbar) or less. To create Schraeder valve located at the
pumped and is in operation and if compressor suction. R22 refrigerant
the vacuum you must connect the the distance between the units is
pump to the Schrader pressure can also be added in liquid phase in
greater than 6m, it may be the liquid line: see method used for
connection on service valve necessary to add an additional
A located on the outdoor unit (gas R407C. Never add liquid in the
charge. Table 13 indicates the suction line of the compressor.
line). To use the vacuum pump, amounts of refrigerant to add per
follow the pump manufacturer's additional meter of line. Once the
instructions. Create a vacuum up to R407C Refrigerant
appropriate amount of refrigerant WARNING! add only R407C
2 mm Hg (2.6mbar) or less. Once the has been added, fully open liquid
value of 2mm Hg or less has been refrigerant in liquid state. Never add
line valve and check the operating liquid in the suction line of the
reached, an increase in pressure will pressure.
be observed after a certain time. The compressor period. Use service
maximum permissible increase is Figure 10 - Adding refrigerant charge Schraeder valve located on the liquid
1 mm Hg after 15 minutes. If the line to charge the unit. While the unit
increase is greater and remains at a is operating, close partially the
A service valve in order to create a
constant value, this means there is
too much humidity in the system. lower pressure downstream the
In this case, break the vacuum using service valve. Add the refrigerant
dry nitrogen and start the vacuum necessary. Control the added weight
creation procedure again. with a scale.
A continuous increase in pressure Table 13 - Additional refrigerant charge
means there is a leak in the system.
Liquid line Gas line Additional
R22/R407C charge (g)
WARNING! 1 = Outdoor unit 1/4'' 1/2'' 26
Valves A and B must not be opened 2 = Gas line 5/16" 5/8" 36
before the installation of the 3 = Indoor units 3/8'' 5/8'' 60
refrigerant circuit has been 4 = Liquid line 3/8'' 3/4'' 60
5 = For sizes 512 to 524 3/8'' 7/8'' 63
completely finished, or the 6 = For sizes 530 to 060 3/8'' 1 1/8'' 68
refrigerant charge will be lost.
Figure 9 - Refrigerant circuit

1 = Outdoor unit
2 = Vacuum pump
3 = Indoor unit
4 = Gas line
5 = Liquid line
6 = TTK/TWK cooling mode

20 SS-SVX07A-E4

Fan speed
Refer to the selection data to select
the static pressure according to the
flow rate. From this it is possible to
deduce a fan rotation speed. Once
you have chosen the speed, refer to
the interconnection diagram to
connect the room thermostat to the
unit electric cabinet in order to
power the correct selected speed.
Configuration and
operation
The unit is equipped with a control
board that manages operation of the
split system. It is fitted with 4
switches, SW1-1 to SW1-4.
Before start-up by a
qualified technician
Once the system has been installed,
it is recommend to carry out the
following checks.
1. Make sure no tools or debris
have been left inside, around or
on top of the unit.
2. Unit is perfectly level in both
directions.
3. Check the electrical connections
have been correctly done. Check
the electric power supply
corresponds to the units'
nameplates.
4. Make sure the disconnect
switches have been disengaged.
5. Check the refrigerant lines are
fixed securely.
6. Check if the condensate drain
pan is correctly installed.
7. Check the piping connections
and the water-tightness of the
connectors using an appropriate
leak detection method. Check
the connections on the site have
been tightened.
8. Make sure the gas piping and
the condensate drainage tube
are insulated properly to prevent
problems with trickling of
condensation water.
SS-SVX07A-E4
Operation
9. Check the fan turns freely. Wired controller operation
10. Make sure the intake and
Figure 12 - Wired controller
discharge ducts are not blocked.
11. Check the filters are correctly
positioned. Show the user how AUTO HEAT
to change the filters. HIGH
MED COOL
12. Power up the system and LOW
observe operation carefully:
make any necessary POWER FAN
adjustments. TEMP+ TEMP-
13. Explain to the user how to
operate the unit.
Unit display and 1 = Press to turn on or off the unit, passing
through the different modes: OFF à COOL à
emergency switch HEAT.
operation 2 = Press TEMP + to increase the setting
temperature. Press TEMP - to decrease the
Four lamps on the unit display show setting temperature. The setting
operating status. In case of loss of temperature will blink for 4 seconds, then
the remote control unit, the system the current room temperature will display.
can be operated temporarily by the 3 = Press to select the required fan speed. The
emergency switch. The emergency speed will be shown by LED indicators:
switch changes the system mode of AUTO ➠ HIGH ➠ MEDIUM ➠ LOW ➠
operation by cycling through the
following modes:
➠ FAN ➠ COOL ➠ HEAT ➠ AUTO ➠
OFF ➠.
COOL, HEAT and AUTO operation
are at fixed setting of 24°C. Fan
speed is controlled by the AUTO
mode. FAN only operation is at
HIGH fan speed.
Figure 11 - Unit display
1 = Remote control receiver - this picks up the
infrared signals from the wireless controller
2 = Fan lamp- lit when the fan is operating
3 = Cooling lamp - lit when the unit is
operating in COOL mode (or COMP ON in
AUTO mode)
4 = Heating lamp - lit when the unit is
operating in HEAT mode (or heater ON in
the HEAT mode of AUTO mode)
5 = Timer lamp - lit when the system is being
controlled by the timer
6 = Emergency switch
21
 Operation

Wireless controller Auto (optional) Clock

The unit can be put into 5 different To set the clock:
operation modes (FAN, COOL, DRY, HEAT and - Press the clock setting button
To use the wireless controller, point AUTO). The cycling will be: (Figure 13, 18). The time display
the transmitter head directly towards ➠ FAN ➠ COOL ➠ DRY ➠ HEAT ➠ will blink.
the unit receiver to emit infrared HEAT ➠ AUTO ➠ - Press the HOUR button to set the
signals. When the system is in AUTO mode, hour. (Figure 13, 20)
Figure 13 - Wireless controller the display on the remote controller - Press the MIN button to set the
will show COOL and HEAT modes at minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
the same time. - Press the clock setting button
again. The time display will stop
Louver (optional) blinking.
FAN 10:14
To change the angle of the louver: if
COOL
DRY 18:40 START the button is pressed and released, Auto start
HEAT 6:30 STOP
AUTO the angle of the louver is changed The unit can be programmed to start
HIGH
MED
one step at a time. If the button is automatically. To program:
LOW
pressed and held, the angle of the - Press the START button. (Figure
louver is changed until the button is 13, 8) The time display will blink.
released. - Press the HOUR button to set the
hour. (Figure 13, 20)
SLEEP MODE
TEMP Sleep mode - Press the MIN button to set the
SWEEP LOUVER
For COOL mode, the setting minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
START STOP
temperature will be automatically - Press the START button again. The
raised 1°C after 1 hour. For HEAT time display will stop blinking.
SEND HOUR MIN
mode, the setting temperature will
be automatically lowered 1°C after 1 Auto stop
hour. The unit can be programmed to stop
When the system is in SLEEP mode, automatically. To program:
pressing the SLEEP button will - Press the STOP button. (Figure 13,
cancel the SLEEP function. When 17) The time display will blink.
1. Operating mode
2. Fan speed the system is in SLEEP mode, - Press the HOUR button to set the
3. Fan button pressing the TEMP button will raise hour. (Figure 13, 20)
4. Sleep button the setting temperature 1°C from the - Press the MIN button to set the
5. Mode button last setting. minutes. (Figure 13, 19)
6. Sweep button - to turn on/off the sweep
When the system is in SLEEP mode - Press the STOP button again. The
motor
7. Louver button and the unit is stopped by a power time display will stop blinking.
8. Timer (start) button failure or is turned off, the SLEEP
9. Send button - to transmit all parameters function will be canceled.
shown on the LCD to the main control
board
10. Clock
11. Timer (start/stop)
12. Transmit mode (lit when remote is being
used)
13. Sleep mode
14. Temperature (range: 16-30°C)
15. Power button
16. Temperature setting button
17. Stop button
18. Clock setting button
19. Minute setting button
20. Hour setting button

22 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Maintenance

WARNING! Handling the filter

Disconnect the unit's power supply
before servicing the unit. When
servicing the units, make sure that
the air passages through the coils
(both internal and external) are
clean, and free of dirt and debris.
1. To remove the filter, slightly push
the 4 clips down.
2. Remove the filter.
3. To put the filter back, just clip the
filter back into place

Periodic maintenance
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these instructions
may cause damage to the unit. The
frequency of servicing will depend
on the conditions for use of the unit,
and will be determined by regular
inspections.
1. Check the condensate piping is
not blocked.
2. Turn the fan blades manually and
make sure they are not damaged.
Clean them if necessary and
verify their alignment.
3. Motor - check the wiring, and
ensure the commutators are
operating correctly. Replace any
damaged components.
4. Disconnection of power and
electrical components - check for
correct operation.
5. Refrigerant circuit - use an
appropriate leak detection method
to check for leaks.
6. Tighten all the screws and bolts.
7. Make sure that the air passages
through the coils (both internal
and external) are clean, and free
of dirt and debris.
8. Clean the filter by beating it and
applying suction in the opposite
direction to the airflow.

SS-SVX07A-E4 23
 Maintenance

Table 14 - Troubleshooting

Symptoms Possible causes Checks Corrective action

1. Loose electrical connections. 1. Tighten the connections if necessary.

A. Compressor or fan is not operating.
2. Check the fuses and wiring. 2. Replace the fuses if necessary.

1. If the check shows the motor windings

1. Check the compressor's wiring and
are broken or earthed, replace the
No cooling or B. The fan is operating but the compressor winding resistors.
compressor.
heating does not start.
2. Check the capacitor 2. Replace if necessary.

C. The compressor is operating but the fan
does not start.
D. Control switch is defective, incorrectly
wired or adjusted.
1. Check the fan motor, the capacitor or
1. Repair or replace
the wiring.
1. Check the control switch connections
1. Change the setting. Replace if defective.
and the temperature setting.

A. Lack of refrigerant fluid. 1. Check there are no leaks. 1. Drain, repair and recharge.

1. Check the air filter. 1. Clean and replace.

2. Check the fin assemblies are clean. 2. Clean if obstructed.

Insufficient heating
B. Insufficient air volume.
or cooling 3. If the fan is loose on its shaft, tighten the
3. Check the fan.
fixing bolts.

4. Check the wiring and capacitors. 4. Repair or replace

1. Check there is no humidity in the

C. Obstructed capillaries or blocked orifice. 1. Drain and recharge.
system.

24 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Maintenance

Symptoms Possible causes Checks Corrective action

A. Control switch no longer responds to the 1. Check operation and connections of

1. Replace the control switch if it is defective.
ambient temperature. the control switch.

The system operates B. Loss of refrigerant fluid. 1. Check there are no leaks in the system. 1. Repair and recharge.
for too long or
continuously. 1. Check the air circulation in the 1. Make sure air circulation is satisfactory.
C. Insufficient ventilation.
condenser. Move the outdoor unit if necessary.

D. Incorrectly adjusted control switch. 1. Check the set point. 1. Adjust or replace if defective.

A. Defective control switch 1. Check operation of the control switch. 1. Replace if defective.

1. Check air circulation in the indoor and

B. Insufficient air circulation. 1. Clean the coil and filter if necessary.
System operates in outdoor units.
short cycles. 1. Check if there are leaks or excess 1. Repair if there are leaks. Add or remove
C. Insufficient or excess refrigerant fluid.
pressure. refrigerant fluid.

D. Incorrect electric power supply. 1. Check the electric power supply. 1. Find cause and stabilise the power supply.

A. Insufficient refrigerant fluid. 1. Check if there are leaks in the system. 1. Repair the leak and recharge.

1. Check the filter. 1. Clean and put back in position.

2. Clean the fins. If the filter is missing, install

2. Check the fin block.
Internal coil frozen. B. Insufficient air circulation. one.
3. Fan free on the bearing, tighten the fixing
3. Check the fan. screws - connection fault, find the cause
and repair.

C. Defective anti-frost sensor. 1. Check the sensor. 1. Replace if necessary.

1. Check installation of the compressor

1. Tighten any loose components.
and motor.
2. If the fan is rubbing against a part, re-align
2. Check the fan position.
it.
A. Defective installation.
3. Check for vibrations of piping and
3. Find the cause and repair.
crankcase.
4. Check positioning of unit concerning
Unit is noisy 4. Find the cause and repair.
noise and vibrations.

B. Motor bearings are worn. 1. Check the motor. 1. Replace the motor if necessary.

C. Noisy compressor. 1. Check if the compressor is losing oil. 1. Locate the leak, repair and add oil.

D. Excess refrigerant fluid or oil. 1. Remove the excess charge.

SS-SVX07A-E4 25
 Trouble-shooting
(electric heating only)

Table 15 - Trouble-shooting (electric heating only)

No heating. A. Incorrect control switch setting.
B. Defective control switch.
C. Defective heater temp. limit switch.
1. Check the thermostat's set points and 1. Change the settings.
operation.
1. Check operation and the signal to the 1. Repair or replace.
heating device.
1. Check the heater temp. limit switch. 1. Replace the defective switch.

D. Unit wiring is incorrect. 1. Check the wiring. 1. Modify the wiring as indicated on
the wiring diagram.
E. The heater temperature limit switch 1. Check tightness of the indoor unit's 1. Tighten the fixing screws.
has opened. fan on its shaft.
F. Dirty air filter. 1. Check the filter. 1. Clean the filter.

G. Indoor unit coil fins obstructed. 1. Check the filter is not missing. 1. Fix the filter.

H. Defective electrical component. 1. Check all the components are correct. 1. Replace the defective component.
2. Check the fin block. 2. Clean the fins.

Controller troubleshooting Dot LED after the first digit of

The controller has a built-in self- 7-segment LED, if blinking indicates
diagnostic function. The following any of the room, freeze or defrost
LEDs are used to indicate the sensor is open or short circuit.
problem or status. Dot LED after the second digit of
Auto/High/Medium/Low LEDs 7-segment LED, indicates that the
show fan speed setting. compressor is on if lit, and indicates
either the freeze or defrost
Cool LED shows the COOL operating protection is active if blinking.
mode.
Figure 14 - LEDs blinking signals
- If the cooling fail protection is
active, this LED will be blinking
with the signal as per Figure 14, A.
- If anti-overheat or low ambient
protection is active, this LED will
be blinking with the signal as per
Figure 14, B.
Heat LED shows the HEAT
operating mode.
- If the heating fail protection is On-board setting
active, this LED will be blinking There is 1 jumper location on the
with the signal as per Figure 14, A. main control board which is related
- If the compressor overload to this setting. If the jumper is put at
protection is active, this LED will OP4 location, both heat pump and
be blinking with the signal as per heater can be operated. If not, only
Figure 14, B. heat pump can be operated.
7-segment LED (2 digits) shows the
room temperature if lit, and the
setting temperature while blinking.

26 SS-SVX07A-E4
 Notes

SS-SVX07A-E4 27
Safety recommendations
To avoid accidents and damage, the
following recommendations should
be observed during maintenance
and service visits :
1. Never apply pressure higher than
7 bar for tests.
2. Disconnect the main supply
before any servicing on the unit.
3. Service work on the refrigeration
system and the electrical system
should be carried out only by
qualified and experienced
personnel.
www.trane.com
For more information, contact
your local district office or e-mail us at
comfort@trane.com
Maintenance contract Training
It is strongly recommended that you The equipment described in this
sign a maintenance contract with manual is the result of many years
your local Service Agency. This of research and continuous
contract provides regular development. To assist you in
maintenance of your installation by obtaining the best use of it, and
a specialist in our equipment. maintaining it in perfect operating
Regular maintenance ensures that condition over a long period of time,
any malfunction is detected and the constructor has at your disposal
corrected in good time and a refrigeration and air conditioning
minimizes the possibility that service school. The principal aim of
serious damage will occur. Finally, this is to give operators and
regular maintenance ensures the maintenance technicians a better
maximum operating life of your knowledge of the equipment they
equipment. We would remind you are using, or that is under their
that failure to respect these charge. Emphasis is particularly
installation and maintenance given to the importance of periodic
instructions may result in immediate checks on the unit operating
cancellation of the warranty. parameters as well as on preventive
maintenance, which reduces the cost
of owning the unit by avoiding
serious and costly breakdown.
Literature Order Number SS-SVX07A-E4
Date 0606
Supersedes SS-SVX07A-E4_0604
Stocking Location Europe
Trane has a policy of continuous product and product data improvement and reserves the right to
change design and specifications without notice.
Only qualified technicians should perform the installation and servicing of equipment referred to in
this publication..
American Standard Europe BVBA
Registered Office: 1789 Chaussée de Wavre, 1160 Brussels - Belgium.